Published: 09-Jul-2015

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Description

Description and Operation

COMPONENT LOCATION

Item Description
1 Paddle switches - upshift / downshift
2 Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
3 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
4 ZF 9HP48 Automatic transmission
5 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) cooler with integrated thermostat

OVERVIEW

The ZF 9HP48 automatic transmission is a 9 speed, electronically controlled unit manufactured by ZF. The transmission
represents the latest in automatic transmission technology for a transverse, AWD (all-wheel drive) unit. The transmission
features lock-up slip control, 'CommandShift™' functions and automatic and driver selectable modes to give the optimum on
and off road performance.

The automatic transmission is controlled by a TCM (transmission control module) which contains software to provide operation
as a semi-automatic 'CommandShift™' transmission. Driver selections for P, R, N, D and S on the rotary TCS (transmission

marvelstar-store
control switch) are received by the TCM . The TCM operates solenoid valves and clutches to control transmission gear shifts,
allowing the system to operate as a 'shift by wire' system, with no mechanical link to the transmission for drive selections.

The TCM allows the transmission to be operated as a conventional automatic unit by selecting P, R, N, D, S on the TCS .
Rotation of the TCS to the 'S' position puts the transmission into electronic 'Sport' mode. Operation of the steering wheel
mounted + or – paddle switches puts the transmission into electronic manual 'CommandShift™' mode.
For additional information, refer to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls,
Description and Operation).

The ZF 9HP48 transmission has the following features:

Designed to be maintenance free

Transmission fluid is fill for life
The torque converter features a controlled slip feature with electronically regulated lock-up control on gears 1 to 9
Planetary gearset with 9 speeds, 4 planetary geartrains, and 6 shift elements
Wide transmission ratio spread with small ratio steps
The first-ever use of interlocking dog clutches in a passenger car automatic transmission
Shift programs controlled by the TCM
TCM has an adaptive capability to ensure efficient gear shift quality throughout the service life of the transmission
Diagnostics available from the TCM via the high speed CAN (controller area network) Powertrain systems bus.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

The transmission comprises the main casing which houses all of the transmission components. The torque converter is located
in a separate converter housing, bolted to the main casing.

ZF 9HP48 Cut-Away View

marvelstar-store
ZF 9HP48 Sectional View

marvelstar-store
Item Description
1 Fluid pan
2 Valve block
3 Planetary gear set 4
4 Planetary gear set 3
5 Planetary gear set 2
6 Planetary gear set 1
7 Dog clutch A

marvelstar-store
 8 Spur pinion
9 Park interlock gear
10 Multiplate clutch 'B'
11 Multiplate brake 'C'
12 Multiplate brake 'D'
13 Left splined output shaft (connection to halfshaft)
14 Right splined output shaft (connection to Power Transfer Unit (PTU))
15 Right splined output shaft (connection to halfshaft)
16 Differential
17 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) pump
18 Multiplate clutch 'E'
19 Dog clutch 'F'
20 Input shaft
21 Torsional damper
22 Torque converter stator
23 Torque converter lock-up clutch
24 Torque converter turbine
25 Torque converter assembly
26 Torque converter impeller
The main casing retains the ATF (automatic transmission fluid) at the bottom. A drain plug is located in the main casing. The
oil level is checked by removal of a level plug, with the engine running and the transmission fluid at a temperature of between
37 to 45°C (99 to 113°F). The level is correct when the oil flow becomes a drip from the level plug hole.

The transmission has a fluid cooler which is located at the front of the transmission, adjacent to the fluid pan. The cooler is
connected to the transmission casing by two sealed connections. The fluid cooler is connected into the engine cooling system
and cools the transmission fluid by heat transfer through the cooler to the engine coolant.
For additional information, refer to: Transmission Cooling (307-02 Transmission/Transaxle Cooling, Description and
Operation).

TORQUE CONVERTER

Item Description

marvelstar-store
 A Torque Converter fitted to GTDi 2.0L and TD4 2.2L Engines
1 Turbine
2 Impeller
3 Stator
4 Transmission connection
5 One-way clutch
6 Lock-up clutch
7 Engine drive plate attachment studs
8 Torsional damper
9 Torque converter housing
B Torque Converter fitted to Ingenium I4 2.0L Diesel Engine
1 Turbine
2 Impeller
3 Stator
4 Transmission connection
5 One-way clutch
6 Lock-up clutch
7 Engine drive plate attachment bolts
8 Torsional damper - including pendulum masses
The torque converter is the coupling element between the engine and the transmission and is located in the torque converter
housing, on the engine side of the transmission. The driven power from the engine crankshaft is transmitted hydraulically and
mechanically through the torque converter to the transmission. The torque converter is connected to the engine by a drive
plate.

The torque converter comprises an impeller, a stator and a turbine. The torque converter is a sealed unit with all components
located between the converter housing cover and the impeller. The two components are welded together to form a sealed,
fluid filled housing. With the impeller welded to the converter housing cover, the impeller is therefore driven at engine
crankshaft speed.

The torque converter contains a hydraulically operated lock-up clutch which is controlled by the TCM via a solenoid in the
valve block. The solenoid actuates spool valves to control the hydraulic pressure applied to the clutch. This allows the TCM to
provide 3 modes of converter operation; unlocked, partially locked and fully locked.

VALVE BLOCK

The valve block is located in a vertical position at the front of the transmission main casing, behind a sealed cover. The valve
block contains a number of solenoids and spool valves to control the transmission operation. The solenoids are controlled by
the TCM to provide gear changes and smooth transition between ratio changes.

If the TCM or the valve block is replaced, a diagnostic routine using an approved Land Rover diagnostic system will be
required to calibrate the TCM .

Valve Block Assembly

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) pump intake
2 ATF pump pressure outlet
3 Sensor unit
4 System Pressure Control Valve (PCV)
5 Torque converter lock-up clutch PCV
6 Multiplate clutch 'B' PCV
7 Multiplate clutch 'E' PCV
8 Dog clutch A solenoid valve
9 Dog clutch F solenoid valve
10 Multiplate clutch 'D' PCV
11 Multiplate clutch 'C' PCV
12 Park lock solenoid valve
13 Magnetic valve control solenoid - park lock actuator
14 Electrical connector
15 Valve block
Valve Block Components

marvelstar-store
Item Description
1 System pressure spool valve
2 Torque converter pressure spool valve
3 Lubrication spool valve
4 Dog clutch 'A' spool valve
5 Dog clutch 'F' spool valve
6 Multiplate clutch 'D' spool valve

marvelstar-store
 7 Magnetic holding valve piston
8 Multiplate clutch 'C' spool valve
9 Park lock spool valve
10 Magnetic valve control solenoid - park lock actuator
11 Park lock solenoid valve
12 Multiplate clutch 'D' Pressure Control Valve (PCV)
13 Multiplate clutch 'C' PCV
14 Retainer
15 Dog clutch 'F' solenoid valve
16 Dog clutch 'A' solenoid valve
17 Multiplate clutch 'E' PCV
18 Multiplate clutch 'B' PCV
19 Torque converter lock-up clutch PCV
20 System PCV
21 Valve housing
22 Intermediate plate
23 Valve and spring
24 Valve and spring
25 Valve and spring
26 Ball rocker
27 Valve and spring
28 Multiplate clutch 'C' spool valve
29 Multiplate clutch 'D' spool valve
30 Pressure sensor
31 Torque converter lock-up clutch spool valve
32 Shift system pressure spool valve
33 Pressure reduction spool valve
34 Valve plate
Pressure Control valves

Six PCV's are located in the valve block. The solenoid operated PCV's are controlled by PWM (pulse width modulation) signals
from the TCM . The solenoids convert the electrical signals into hydraulic control pressure proportional to the signal to actuate
the spool valves and clutches for precise transmission operation.

Five PCV solenoids for the multiplate clutch and the torque converter lock-up clutch supply a higher control pressure as the
signal current increases and can be identified by an orange connector cap. The TCM operates the solenoids using PWM signals.
The TCM monitors engine load and clutch slip and varies the solenoid duty cycle accordingly. The solenoids have a 12 V
operating voltage and a pressure range of 0 - 4.7 bar (0 - 68 lbf.in²).

One PCV solenoid for the system pressure control supplies a lower control pressure as the signal amperage increases and can
be identified by a gray connector cap. The TCM monitors engine load and clutch slip and varies the solenoid duty cycle
accordingly. The solenoids have a 12 V operating voltage and a pressure range of 4.7 - 0 bar (68 - 0 lbf.in 2 ).

The resistance of the solenoid coil winding for all PCV solenoids is 5.05 Ohms at 20 °C (68 °F).

Solenoid Valves

marvelstar-store
Three solenoid valves are located in the valve block. The solenoid valves are controlled by the TCM and converts electrical
signals into hydraulic control signals to control dog clutch application.

The solenoid valve is an open/closed, on/off solenoid which is controlled by the TCM switching the solenoid to earth. The TCM
also supplies power to the solenoid. The TCM energises the solenoid in a programmed sequence for clutch application for gear
ratio changes and shift control.

The resistance of the solenoid coil winding for solenoid is between 10 to 11 Ohms at 20 °C (68 °F).

Park Lock Actuator - Magnetic Valve Control Solenoid

Item Description
A Solenoid in locked (energized) condition - park lock released
B Solenoid in unlocked (de-energized) condition - park lock engaged
1 Park lock spool valve
2 Control solenoid
3 Claw locked
4 Claw unlocked
A control solenoid is located in the valve block. The solenoid is controlled by the TCM and converts electrical signals into
hydraulic control signals to control the electronic park lock function.

The control solenoid is an on/off solenoid which is controlled by the TCM by switching the solenoid to earth.

marvelstar-store
When the Park lock is to be released, the park lock solenoid valve sends ATF pressure to the spool valve and moves it into
contact with the claws of the solenoid. Movement of the spool valve moves the park rod and releases the park pawl from the
park interlock gear. The control solenoid is energised by the TCM and the claws close to retain the spool valve in the unlocked
position. A shuttle valve retains ATF pressure on the spool to prevent inadvertent park lock operation in the event of an
electrical failure until the engine is stopped.

When the Park lock is to be engaged, ATF pressure is released from the spool valve and the TCM de-energises the control
solenoid. The claws are released, the spool valve returns under spring pressure to the park lock position and the park lock is
engaged. A Service Park Release (SPR) procedure must be performed to release the parking lock manually if an electrical
failure occurs or the engine is not running.

To allow the vehicle to roll through a car wash, the control solenoid remains energised if the engine is stopped with the TCS in
neutral. This holds the transmission out of park without hydraulic pressure for 10 minutes. After this time the control solenoid
is de-energised, releasing the claws and allowing the spool valve to return to the park position.

The resistance of the solenoid coil winding is 25 Ohms at 20 °C (68 °F).

Sensor Unit

Item Description
1 'PARK' (P) sensor
2 Pressure sensor connector
3 Speed sensor (torque converter turbine and output shaft)
4 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) temperature sensor
5 Connector pins for pressure control valves, solenoid valves and park lock control solenoid
6 Connector board
7 Transmission electrical connector
The sensor unit is mounted on the valve block and secured with three screws. The sensor unit comprises a 26 pin electrical
connector, a 'PARK' sensor, a pressure sensor connector, two speed sensors, ten solenoid connectors and an ATF temperature
sensor.

The electrical connector is fitted with seals through a hole in the transmission main casing and secured with a spring clip.

The 'PARK' (P) sensor is located inside the main casing, adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a boss in
the main casing with a screw. The 'PARK' sensor comprises a sliding switch which is operated by the selector shaft when it is
moved by the park lock actuator.

Two speed sensors are used in the transmission and are located within the transmission housing and are connected to the
sensor unit. The sensors take their speed reading from the slots in the clutch basket of the multiplate clutch E and the gear

marvelstar-store
teeth of the spur pinion. The sensors provide input and output speed signals to the TCM . Both speed signals are received by
the TCM which uses the signals to calculate engine torque output, shift timing and torque converter lock-up.

The fluid temperature sensor is integrated into the internal wiring harness within the transmission sensor unit. It detects the
ATF temperature in the transmission and transmits a signal corresponding to the temperature to the TCM . The TCM monitors
the temperature and adjusts clutch and brake application to provide smooth gear shifts across a wide range of temperatures
and ATF viscosities.

Each solenoid is connected by two pins integral with the connector board. Each solenoid pins is connected via a harness to the
electrical connector.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) PUMP

Item Description
1 ATF filter
2 Intermediate plate
3 Drive pinion
4 Stator shaft
5 Drive chain
6 ATF pump
The ATF pump is located in an intermediate plate within the transmission main casing. The intermediate plate is attached to
the inside of the transmission main casing with studs and nuts, behind the torque converter. The intermediate plate contains

marvelstar-store
the splined stator shaft, to which the torque converter stator is connected. The torque converter shell extends into and drives
a drive pinion with an integral sprocket, which operates a roller drive chain to drive the ATF pump. The drive pinion is
therefore rotated at engine speed.

The pump is located at the bottom of the transmission main casing and is attached to the housing with screws. An ATF filter
ensures that any particulate matter is collected by the filter before the ATF enters the ATF pump.

The ATF pump is a vane cell pump which can produce a pressure of between 3.5 and 44.0 bar (50 and 638 lbf/in²) and a flow
of 14.7 cm³ (0.9 in³). The pump can operate at speeds from 700 to 7800 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) with a maximum
speed of 8600 RPM.

DRIVE CLUTCHES

Multiplate Drive or Brake Clutch – Typical

marvelstar-store
Item Description
1 Cylinder
2 Piston
3 Disk spring
4 Metal plates
5 Friction plates
6 Baffle plate
7 Pressure equalization chamber

marvelstar-store
 8 Piston chamber
There are two multiplate drive clutches and two multiplate brakes used in the ZF 9HP48 automatic transmission. Each clutch
or brake comprises a number of friction plates dependent on the output controlled. A typical clutch or brake consists of a
number of steel outer plates and inner plates with friction material bonded to each face.

The drive clutches have both the friction plate and the metal plates rotating when the clutch is open. Multiplate brakes have
either the friction plate or the metal plate rotating, with one fixed stationary.

Clutch / Brake Operation

Multiplate clutch 'B' Connects the input shaft to sun gear 'S1'
Multiplate clutch 'E' Connects the input shaft to planet carrier 3 and ring gear 4
Multiplate brake 'C' Locks sun gear 'S1'
Multiplate brake 'D' Locks ring gear 2
The multiplate clutch and brake plates are held apart mechanically by a disk spring and hydraulically by ATF pressure. The
ATF pressure is derived from a lubrication channel which supplies ATF to the transmission components. The ATF is passed via
drillings in the input shaft into the chamber between the baffle plate and the piston. To prevent inadvertent clutch application
due to pressure build up produced by centrifugal force, the fluid in the pressure equalization chamber overcomes any pressure
in the piston chamber and holds the piston off the clutch plate assembly. The multiplate brakes do not require a baffle plate
and pressure equalization chamber to compensate for centrifugal pressure which occurs in a rotating piston.

When clutch application is required, pressure from the ATF pump is applied to the piston chamber from the supply port. This
pressure overcomes the low pressure fluid present in the pressure equalization chamber. The piston moves, against the
pressure applied by the disk spring, and compresses the clutch plate assembly. When the pressure falls, the disk spring
pushes the piston away from the clutch plate assembly, disengaging the clutch.

DOG CLUTCHES

Two dog clutches are used on the transmission; dog clutch 'A' connects the input shaft to sun gear S2 and ring gear R1, and
dog clutch 'F' connects sun gears S3 and S4 to the centering plate mounted in the transmission casing.

Both dog clutches are similar in their operation. Each clutch is operated by ATF pressure acting on a double acting piston to
move the dog clutch into and out of engagement.

Dog Clutch 'A'

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Planetary gear set 1
2 Sensing piston
3 Dog 'A'
4 ATF pressure supply for dog clutch 'A' release
5 Input shaft
6 Piston
7 Planet carrier
8 ATF pressure supply for dog clutch 'A' engagement
Dog clutch 'A' is located at the end of the input shaft and is controlled by a double acting piston located within the input shaft.

A double acting piston is located internally in the input shaft and can move within the shaft when ATF pressure is applied to
either side of the piston. The piston is connected to the dog 'A' by a pin which moves in a slot in the input shaft.

Dog 'A' is a sleeve with internal and external splines. Dog 'A' is permanently engaged with the input shaft via the internal
splines. When the piston moves dog 'A' along the input shaft to the 'closed' position, dog 'A' engages with splines on the
gearset 1 and 2 planet carrier, transferring drive from the input shaft to the gear set 2. When the dog 'A' is to be disengaged
to the 'open' position, ATF pressure is applied to the opposite side of the piston and dog 'A' is moved along the input shaft and
is disengaged from the planet carrier. Dog 'A' is in the 'closed' position in gears 1 through 7.

marvelstar-store
The dog 'A' has two states; open and closed. The piston cannot determine if the dog 'A' has travelled its full distance into or
out of engagement with the ring gear carrier or has remained in an intermediate position. The piston is fitted with a sensing
piston and the ATF pressure leakage through the sensing piston can be measured by the pressure sensor in the sensor unit.

The sensing piston is hollow and moves axially within the piston. Referring to the below illustration, if ATF pressure is applied
to the right side of the piston, the piston and the sensing piston are pushed to the left. During the movement of the piston, a
small amount of ATF pressure is passed through the sensing piston. This leakage pressure is measured at the left side of the
piston by the pressure sensor. When the piston has moved fully to the left and reached its end position, the leakage through
the sensing piston is blocked. The pressure drop on the left side of the piston is sensed and the TCM can determine the dog
clutch 'A' is fully disengaged with the ring gear carrier.

If the pressure on the left side of the piston does not drop within a specified shift time, the TCM can determine that the dog
'A' has stopped in an intermediate position.

The dog clutch 'A' has four possible states of operation as follows:

marvelstar-store
Item Description
A Dog 'A' open - piston at end position
B Dog 'A' closing - piston at intermediate position
C Dog 'A' closed - piston at end position
D Dog 'A' opening - piston at intermediate position
1 ATF Pressure applied - dog 'A' open
2 ATF pressure applied - dog 'A' closed
3 Leakage through sensing piston for pressure sensing.

marvelstar-store
A. Dog 'A' Open - ATF pressure is applied to the piston from the left side chamber and the dog clutch 'A' is open. The ATF
pressure in the right chamber is almost zero because the sensing piston is pushed to its limit of movement and leakage
through the sensing piston is prevented.

B. Dog 'A' Closing - ATF pressure is applied from the right side chamber which starts the piston moving to the left into
engagement with the ring gear carrier. The piston is now in the intermediate position and leakage pressure is passed through
the sensing piston into the left side chamber. Pressure in the left side chamber can be measured and will be approximately 2
bar (29 lbf in³).

C. Dog 'A' Closed - ATF pressure is applied to the piston from the right side chamber, the dog 'A' is closed and fully engaged
with the ring gear carrier. The ATF pressure in the left chamber is almost zero because the sensing piston is pushed to its limit
of movement and leakage through the sensing piston is prevented.

D. Dog 'A' Opening - ATF pressure is applied to the piston from the left side chamber which starts the piston moving to the
right and disengaging from the ring gear carrier. The piston is now in the intermediate position and leakage pressure is passed
through the sensing piston into the right side chamber. Pressure in the right side chamber can be measured and will be
approximately 2 bar (29 lbf in³).

Dog Clutch 'F'

Item Description
1 ATF pressure supply - open
2 Spur pinion
3 Angular contact ball bearing race

marvelstar-store
 4 ATF pressure supply - close
5 Pressure sensing leakage hole
6 Sun gear 3 and 4
7 Dog 'F'
8 Bearing support housing
Dog clutch 'F' is located between the multiplate clutch 'E' and planetary gear set 4. The dog clutch is controlled by a double
acting piston located within the bearing support housing.

Dog 'F' is a sleeve with internal and external splines. Dog 'F' is permanently engaged on the splines with the bearing support
housing, which in turn is fixed and static within the transmission casing. When dog 'F' is moved to the closed position, it acts
as a brake for sun gears 3 and 4 in planetary gear set 4.

The dog 'F' has two states; open and closed. Dog 'F' employs a more simple sensing system than dog 'A'. Dog 'F' is also the
piston itself and does not use a sensing piston. The piston of dog 'F' has a leakage sensing hole which is used to detect its
current position via pressure sensing.

Referring to the below illustration, if ATF pressure is applied to the right side of the piston, the piston is pushed to the left.
During the movement of the piston, a small amount of ATF pressure is passed through the leakage sensing hole. This leakage
pressure is measured at the left side of the piston by the pressure sensor in the sensor unit. When the piston has moved fully
to the left and reached its end position, the leakage through the leakage sensing hole is blocked. The pressure drop on the left
side of the piston is sensed and the TCM can determine that dog clutch 'F' is fully engaged with sun gears 3 and 4.

If the pressure on the left side of the piston does not drop within a specified shift time, the TCM can determine that the dog 'F'
has stopped in an intermediate position.

The dog clutch 'F' has four possible states of operation as follows:

marvelstar-store
Item Description
A Dog 'F' open - piston at end position
B Dog 'F' closing - piston at intermediate position
C Dog 'F' closed - piston at end position
D Dog 'F' opening - piston at intermediate position
1 ATF Pressure applied - dog 'F' open
2 ATF pressure applied - dog 'F' closed
3 ATF pressure applied - dog 'F' in intermediate position

marvelstar-store
 4 Leakage through leakage sensing hole for pressure sensing
A. Dog 'F' Open - ATF pressure is applied to the piston from the right side chamber and the dog clutch 'F' is open. The ATF
pressure in the left chamber is almost zero because the piston is pushed to its limit of movement and leakage through the
leakage sensing hole is prevented.

B. Dog 'F' Closing - ATF pressure is applied from the left side chamber which starts the piston moving to the right into
engagement with the sun gears 3 and 4. The piston is now in the intermediate position and leakage pressure is passed
through the leakage sensing hole into the right side chamber. Pressure in the right side chamber can be measured and will be
approximately 2 bar (29 lbf in³).

C. Dog 'F' Closed - ATF pressure is applied to the piston from the left side chamber, the dog 'F' is closed and fully engaged
with the sun gears 3 and 4. The ATF pressure in the right chamber is almost zero because the piston is pushed to its limit of
movement and leakage through the leakage sensing hole is prevented.

D. Dog 'F' Opening - ATF pressure is applied to the piston from the right side chamber which starts the piston moving to the
left and disengaging from the sun gears 3 and 4. The piston is now in the intermediate position and leakage pressure is
passed through the leakage sensing hole into the left side chamber. Pressure in the left side chamber can be measured and
will be approximately 2 bar (29 lbf in³).

One-Way Clutch - Torque Converter

Item Description
A Unlocked condition
B Locked condition
1 Roller
2 Cage
3 Spring
4 Inner race
The roller clutch uses parallel rollers, located between the smooth, cylindrical inner race and the inclined cam faces of the
clutch body. Springs are used to hold the rollers in position between the two contact faces.

When the clutch is rotated in a clockwise direction, the rollers become trapped between the inner race and the inclined cam
faces of the clutch body, providing positive (locked) rotation of the inner race, locking the clockwise rotation of the stator.
When the clutch is rotated in a clockwise direction, the rollers are moved away from the inclined cam faces and can rotate
freely (unlocked) with the clutch body, this allows the torque converter stator to rotate freely when the vehicle is decelerating.

PLANETARY GEAR TRAINS

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Gear set 1
2 Gearset 2
3 Gear set 3
4 Gear set 4
The planetary gear trains used on the 9HP48 transmission comprise four planetary gear sets; GS1, GS2, GS3 and GS4.

marvelstar-store
Engine torque is transferred, via operation of single or combinations of multiplate clutches, multiplate brakes and two dog
clutches, to the four planetary gear trains. The gear trains are controlled by reactionary inputs from the multiplate clutches to
produce the nine forward gears and one reverse gear. The gear ratios are as follows:

Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th Reverse
Ratio 4.713 2.842 1.909 1.382 1.00 0.808 0.699 0.580 0.480 3.830
Sun gear S2 of gear set GS2 has additional internal gearing and also operates as the ring gear R1 of gear set GS1.

Ring gear R3 is connected to planet carrier PC1 and PC2 and therefore rotates in the same direction and speed as the planet
carrier.

Gear sets GS3 and GS4 are connected via a joint sun gear S3/S4 as a Simpson planetary gear set.

Ring gear R4 is connected to planet carrier PC3 and therefore rotates in the same direction and speed as the planet carrier.

Final output from the transmission occurs via gear set GS4 via a spur gear to the differential.

POWER FLOW

Operation of the transmission is controlled by the TCM which electrically activates various solenoids to control clutches to
achieve the required transmission gear selection. The sequence of solenoid activation is based on programmed information in
the TCM memory and physical transmission operating conditions such as vehicle speed, throttle position, engine load and the
TCS position.

Item Description
1 Torque converter lock-up clutch
2 Torque converter
3 Torque converter one-way clutch
4 Multiplate cutch 'E'
5 Dog clutch 'F'
6 Planetary gears P4
7 Ring gear R4
8 Ring gear R3
9 Planetary gear P3
10 Sun gear S4
11 Sun gear S3

marvelstar-store
 12 Dog clutch 'A'
13 Sun gear S1
14 Planetary gear P1
15 Ring gear R1
16 Sun gear S2
17 Planetary gear P2
18 Ring gear R2
19 Multiplate brake 'D'
20 Multiplate brake 'C'
21 Multiplate clutch 'B'
Solenoid Operation

The following table shows the clutches that are closed to achieve the required gear ratios.

Multiplate Clutch 'C' Multiplate Clutch 'D' Multiplate Clutch Multiplate Clutch Dog Clutch Dog Clutch
Gear
(Brake) (Brake) 'B' 'E' 'F' 'A'
1 X X X
2 X X X
3 X X X
4 X X X
5 X X X
6 X X X
7 X X X
8 X X X
9 X X X
R X X X
X= Clutch closed

In neutral, all of the solenoids are de-energized and the clutches and brakes are all disengaged, with the exception of dog
clutch 'F' which is engaged when the transmission is in neutral. This allows rotation from the input shaft to rotate the
planetary gear sets without transferring any drive to the differential.

PARK LOCK

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Park lock lever - Connection with park lock actuator spool valve
2 Selector shaft Service Park Release (SPR) lever
3 Park rod
4 Spring
5 Park lock pawl
6 Spring
7 Differential spur gear
8 Park lock gear
9 Park lock lever - Connection with PARK (P) sensor
The park lock comprises a selector shaft, a park lock lever, a shift rod, a park lock pawl and a park lock gear.

The park lock is electronically and hydraulically actuated via a control solenoid and a spool valve, which are located in the
valve block. A slot in the spool valve engages with a connection with a lever on the selector shaft. A second connection on the
lever engages with the PARK (P) sensor which is part of the sensor unit. Refer to the 'Valve Block' and 'Sensor Unit' sections in
this section for details of the individual components.

When the control solenoid is actuated, the park lock spool moves, rotating the park lock lever. The rotary motion of the lever
is converted to linear movement of the shift rod which moves in the required direction to apply or release the park lock pawl
from the park lock gear.

marvelstar-store
Service Park Release (SPR)

The SPR is a mechanical procedure which requires removal of the air filter housing for access. The procedure is required when
there has been a loss of vehicle electrical power or a failure to the automatic transmission preventing release of the park lock.

The following procedure must be used to release the park lock before moving the vehicle. The vehicle must be held by either
the electric park brake or wheel chocks to prevent it unintentionally moving when the park lock is released.

Item Description
A SPR engaged
B SPR released
1 5mm locking pin
Apply SPR

Make sure that the ignition is off (power mode 4)

Remove the air filter assembly to get access to the SPR lever on the automatic transmission
Rotate the SPR lever in a counter clockwise direction until the slot in the SPR lever aligns with a corresponding hole in
the automatic transmission casing
Hold the SPR lever in this position and insert a suitable 5mm diameter locking pin (Allen key for example) through the
slot in the SPR lever and into the hole in the automatic transmission casing
The vehicle can now be moved.

Release SPR

Remove the 5mm diameter locking pin from the SPR lever
Make sure the SPR lever has moved fully clockwise and the park lock is engaged
Replace the air filter assembly.

TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

marvelstar-store
The TCM is located on the top of the automatic transmission casing and is connected on the high speed CAN powertrain
systems bus to send and receive information to and from other system modules.

The TCM outputs signals to operate the transmission solenoid valves to control the hydraulic operation of the transmission.

The ECM (engine control module) supplies the engine management data on the high speed CAN powertrain systems bus. The
TCM requires engine data to efficiently control the automatic transmission operation, using for example; crankshaft torque,
engine speed, accelerator pedal angle, engine temperature etc.

The TCM processes signals from the transmission speed and temperature sensors, ECM and other vehicle systems. From the
received signal inputs and pre-programmed data, the TCM calculates the correct gear, torque converter clutch setting and
optimum settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control.

The steering angle sensor and the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module also supply data to the TCM on the high speed CAN
powertrain systems bus. The TCM uses data from these systems to suspend gear changes when the vehicle is cornering
and/or the ABS module is controlling braking or traction control.

The transmission is controlled by a 'shift by wire' system. The TCS is connected to the TCM on the high speed CAN powertrain
systems bus. Driver selections made on the TCS are passed via CAN messages to the TCM .

If the TCM , the transmission or the valve block is replaced, a diagnostic routine using an approved Land Rover diagnostic
system will be required to calibrate the TCM to learn the Touchpoint Adaptions. Refer to 'Touchpoint Adaptions' and 'Clutch
Adaptions' later in this section.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

NOTE: The following illustration shows the display when the transmission is in CommandShift™ mode. PRNDS is
displayed during normal transmission operation.

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
2 Gear indicator (Dynamic mode)
3 Transmission indicator
The instrument cluster is connected to the TCM via the high speed CAN powertrain systems bus. Transmission status is
transmitted by the TCM and displayed to the driver in the instrument cluster.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) is located in the upper right side of the instrument cluster, within the tachometer.
Transmission related faults which may affect the vehicle emissions output will illuminate the MIL .

The MIL is illuminated by the ECM on receipt of a relevant fault message from the TCM on the high speed CAN powertrain
systems bus. The nature of the fault can be diagnosed using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system which reads fault
codes stored in the memory.

Transmission Status Display

The transmission status display is located in the central Thin Film Transistor (TFT) message display in the instrument cluster.
The display shows the selected P R N D S position and the current selected gear in normal transmission modes. In Drive 'D'
the current gear is not displayed unless the paddle switches are operated.

In Dynamic (Sport) mode, the selected transmission gear is displayed in a central position in the TFT display.

DRIVING MODES

A number of different driving modes are available. Some can be selected by the driver and some are automatically initiated by
the TCM to adapt to different driving conditions.

Normal
Sports
Manual 'CommandShift™'
Cooling
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
Cruise
Limp home
Coast
Fast off recognition
Uphill and Trailer
Downhill

marvelstar-store
 Wide Throttle
Terrain Response
Reverse lock-out
Kick-Down
Shift Adapt Under Braking
Corner Recognition
Road Gradient Recognition
Driver Type Recognition

Normal

Normal mode is automatically selected by the TCM when the ignition is switched on (ignition mode 6). In this mode all
automatic and adaptive modes are active. Normal mode uses gear shift and lock-up maps which provide the optimum of fuel
consumption, emissions and driveability, depending on the driving style.

If the transmission is operated in sport mode or 'CommandShift™' mode and the TCS is moved back to the drive 'D' position,
then normal mode operation is resumed.

Sports

Sports mode provides enhanced acceleration and responsiveness by the use of sports shift maps. This mode allows the
transmission to down shift more readily and hold gears for longer at higher engine speeds.

Manual 'CommandShift™'

Manual 'CommandShift' mode allows the transmission to operate as a semi-automatic transmission. The driver can change up
and down the nine forward gears with the freedom of a manual transmission provided the requested gear is within the allowed
engine and vehicle speed range.

Shift maps are provided to protect the engine at high speeds. The TCM will automatically change up to a higher gear ratio to
prevent engine overspeed and change down to a lower gear ratio to avoid engine laboring and stalling.

When kick-down is requested the TCM shifts down to the lowest available gear. When the vehicle is stationary, the driver can
select 1st or 2nd to start off.

Upshifts (+) are optimized for performance via the short shift function, resulting in firmer feeling shifts than in automatic
mode. Downshift requests (-) utilize a throttle 'blip' during the shift, resulting in an improved shift feel.

Temporary Manual Gear Selection

With the TCS in the 'D' position, manual mode can be directly accessed by the single action of operating one of the steering
wheel paddle switches. This allows immediate, but temporary use of the shift paddles when the TCS is in 'D'. If continued use
of manual mode is required, the TCS must be moved to the Sport 'S' position to enter permanent manual mode in the
currently selected gear.

If the TCS remains in the 'D' position, temporary manual mode will be held while the driver is accelerating, decelerating,
cornering or continuing to request shifts using the paddle switches. The transmission will revert back to automatic operation
after a short period of driving at a steady speed. Alternatively, the upshift (+) paddle can be held for approximately 2 seconds
to return to automatic mode in TCS position 'D'.

Permanent Manual Gear Selection

Select the 'S' position on the TCS , permanent manual mode is then accessed by the operation of the steering paddle
switches. The instrument cluster message center will show the currently selected gear. To exit from manual mode, pull and
hold the upshift (+) paddle switch for approximately 2 seconds to return to automatic operation in Sport (S) mode.
Alternatively, rotate the TCS to the 'D' position; the transmission will revert to 'D' automatic mode.

Manual Operation

Upshifts are performed using a brief operation of the upshift (+) paddle switch. Downshifts are performed using the downshift
(-) paddle switch. The message center will display the selected gear.

The transmission will inhibit upshifts and downshifts if the requested shift would result in an engine speed outside the engine's
operating range.

Commandshift™ - Additional Features

Kick-Down: - Operation of kick-down mode will override the currently selected gear. The lowest available gear will be selected
for maximum acceleration and will be highlighted in the message center. Subsequent manual shifts may then be selected as
usual.

Positive Torque: - Provides throttle 'blips' on downshifts, improving transmission shift quality and response.

Shift Assist: - The transmission will automatically upshift at the engine speed redline in CommandShift mode, as if operated
manually. The transmission will automatically downshift, when the engine speed falls below the range for the currently
selected gear. When the vehicle approaches, or comes to rest, second gear is automatically selected. Subsequent starts from
standstill will occur in second gear, unless accelerator pedal demand is high or a downshift is manually selected, in which case
first gear will be selected. In all cases the message center will show the currently selected gear.

marvelstar-store
During sustained braking, if a downshift is selected at a speed which would result in an engine speed outside the engine's
operating range, the downshift will be delayed until the vehicle speed has reduced sufficiently for the gear selection to be
made, without causing the engine speed to exceed its normal operating range.

Cooling

Cooling mode is activated when the TCM detects excessively high ATF or engine coolant temperatures. When this mode is
active, torque converter lock-up is activated earlier to minimize a further rise in ATF and/or engine coolant temperature and
assist ATF cooling.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

The HDC mode assists the ABS control module in controlling the downhill speed of the vehicle. When HDC is active, the TCM
selects the most appropriate gear for the descent to maximize engine braking.

Maximum engine braking is applied using a shift map which initiates later upshifts and early downshifts.

Cruise

When speed control is activated, the TCM receives a speed control active message on the high speed CAN powertrain systems
bus. The TCM activates a speed control map which minimizes up and down shifts.

Cruise mode is active when speed control is selected to 'on' and the transmission is in drive 'D', Sport 'S', HDC or a Terrain
Response Grass/gravel/snow program. Unique cruise maps override the current mode to provide a smooth driving feel and
mode reselection.

Limp Home

If a transmission fault is detected by the TCM , the TCM adopts a limp home strategy and a message 'TRANSMISSION FAULT
LIMITED GEARS AVAILABLE' is displayed in the message center. If the fault has an effect on engine emissions, the MIL in the
instrument cluster will also be illuminated.

In limp home mode, P, R and N functions operate normally (if the fault allows these selections) and the TCM locks the
transmission in an available gear to allow the driver to take the vehicle to a Land Rover dealer or approved repairer. Torque
converter lock-up is disabled and reverse-lock-out will not function.

If the vehicle is stopped and subsequently restarted in the limp home mode condition, the TCM operates normally until the
fault which caused the condition is detected again.

Coast

Coast mode provides earlier downshifts during coasting dependant on output shaft deceleration rate to improve driveability
and refinement by avoiding negative to positive driveline torque reversal transmissions during the downshifts.

Fast Off Recognition

Fast off recognition is activated when the TCM detects that the driver has released the accelerator pedal quickly. This is
detected by the TCM monitoring for a high level of negative pedal angle from ECM signals on the high speed CAN Powertrain
systems bus. If this condition is detected, the TCM holds the current gear ratio to allow the driver to complete the manoeuvre
without the need for a downshift. The mode can remain active for a predetermined length of time or if the driving style
remains passive.

Fast off recognition mode assists vehicle stability and is used in conjunction with a lateral acceleration input during cornering
to maintain the current gear until the corner is negotiated.

Uphill and Trailer

Uphill and trailer mode can be active when the transmission is operating in normal, sport or Terrain Response modes. When
the vehicle is pulling a trailer or driving up an incline, the TCM detects the increased resistance by monitoring engine torque
and speed signals received from the ECM on the high speed CAN powertrain systems bus and also transmission output shaft
speed sensor signals. Uphill and trailer mode will provide downshifts to prevent a drop in transmission torque output and
maintain driving force.

Downhill

Downhill mode can be active when the transmission is operating in normal, sport or Terrain Response modes. When the
vehicle is descending an incline, the TCM detects a reduction in resistance by monitoring engine torque and speed signals
received from the ECM on the high speed CAN powertrain systems bus and also transmission output shaft speed sensor
signals. Downhill mode assists engine braking by selecting an appropriate gear reducing the load required on the brakes.

Wide Throttle

Wide open throttle mode operates for part throttle upshifts and kick-down upshifts. It provides consistent wide open throttle
upshift performance under all driving conditions. The full engine speed range is used in all driving modes; normal, sport, hill
modes and CommandShift™. Compensation is used for delays (hydraulic and electronic) in gear change request to gear
change start to provide smooth changes and correct shift point correction.

Terrain Response

marvelstar-store
The Terrain Response system has a unique set of shift maps for each of the Terrain Response programs. These programs
override existing modes; for example when HDC is active and the 'Sand', 'Mud and Ruts' or 'Grass/Gravel/Snow' programs are
selected, a specific Terrain Response map is used, not the HDC mode shift map detailed previously.

Reverse Lock-Out

If the TCS is moved from N to R and the vehicle is travelling forwards, reverse selection is prevented if the vehicle speed is 5
km/h (3 mph) or more.

The same strategy is applied if the vehicle is moving backwards and D or S are selected on the TCS , the selection will be
prevented if the vehicle speed is 5 km/h (3 mph) or more.

Kick-Down

When D is selected and the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the transmission will down-shift to the lowest appropriate
gear. Once the accelerator pedal is returned to a normal driving position, the transmission will upshift to the highest
appropriate gear. Kick-down will vary according to road speed, current gear selection and accelerator pedal movement.

Shift Adapt Under Braking

Under braking, the transmission will vary the downshift point in proportion to braking effort and road gradient. This feature
works in conjunction with the positive torque function, resulting in a smoother down-shift. If Sport mode S is selected, driver
type recognition will vary the activation of this feature according to driving style.

Corner Recognition

Corner recognition inhibits up-shifts during cornering to provide improved vehicle balance. If Sport mode S is selected, driver
type recognition will vary the activation of this feature according to driving style.

Road Gradient recognition

When the vehicle is driven on an uphill gradient, the transmission adapts the shift pattern to make better use of the engine
power.

When the vehicle is driven on a long downhill gradient, the transmission may automatically select a lower gear to increase
engine braking. Selecting Sport mode S will increase the tendency of the transmission to select a lower gear in these
conditions, further increasing engine braking.

It is also possible to select a lower gear to increase engine braking using the gear shift - paddle switch.

Driver Type Recognition

In Sport mode S, the transmission monitors driving style and in combination with other vehicle systems, varies the shift
schedule, fast off, corner recognition and shift adapt under braking functions according to the driving style.

TRANSMISSION FAULT STATUS

If the TCM detects a fault with the transmission system, it will enter a default (limp home) mode to prevent further damage to
the transmission and allow the vehicle to be driven. If possible reverse gear will be available and also 3rd gear only.

When a fault is detected, a high speed CAN powertrain systems bus message is sent from the TCM and is received by the
instrument cluster. The instrument cluster illuminates the MIL (if required) and displays an applicable message in the message
center.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).

Some transmission faults may not illuminate the MIL or display a fault message, but the driver may notice a reduction in shift
quality.

TOUCHPOINT ADAPTIONS

The transmission is supplied by ZF with Touchpoint Adaptions set in the Transmission Control Module (TCM) at the factory
which match the transmission to which the TCM is attached.

CAUTION: TOUCHPOINT ADAPTIONS MUST ONLY BE PERFORMED WHEN A NEW TCM OR A TCM FROM ANOTHER
VEHICLE HAS BEEN FITTED. UNDER NO OTHER CIRCUMSTANCES MUST TOUCHPOINT ADAPTIONS BE PERFORMED. Resetting
Touchpoint Adaptions for any reason other than replacing the TCM could result in poor shift performance if the procedure is
carried out unnecessarily.

Before performing a diagnostic Touchpoint Adaption reset procedure using an approved Land Rover diagnostic system, ensure
the following conditions are applied:

the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is at a temperature greater than 30 degrees C (86 degrees F)
the Transmission Control switch (TCS) is in the 'Park' position
the vehicle is stationary
the engine is running at idle speed
Brake pressure applied using the foot brake
the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is applied and held on manually to ensure it does not release when 'Drive' is selected
no faults or Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present in the TCM.

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: If the EPB is allowed to release, the Touchpoint Adaption reset procedure will be terminated.

When the transmission is built, it is tested at the ZF factory to determine how much electrical current is required by each
Pressure Control Valve (PCV) to attain a datum engagement point. The engagement (Touchpoint) is determine by a
predefined level of friction in the clutch plates.

This data is stored with the serial number of the transmission and the same data is written to the TCM fitted to that
transmission. This ensures that each transmission has a uniform performance.

If the Touchpoint Adaption data is not available because the TCM or the transmission has been replaced, the Touchpoint
Adaptions contained in the TCM will be incorrect for the transmission. This will result in harsh clutch engagements and could
cause damage to the transmission.

Using the Touchpoint Adaptions learning routine in the approved Land Rover diagnostic system, enables the TCM to establish
the Touchpoint for all the clutches. Once the Touchpoint Adaptions have been learnt, the Clutch Adaptions routine must be
performed to further refine the transmission operation.

CLUTCH ADAPTIONS

When the vehicle is driven, the TCM monitors and refines the clutch pressures and engagement points to maintain smooth
transition between gear changes.

After certain service operations, the Clutch Adaptions may need to be reset to restore optimum performance of the
transmission.

When the vehicle is driven, the TCM monitors the gear changes. When the TCM determines that smooth and reliable changes
are occurring, it initiates a Clutch Adaptions learning cycle. The learning cycle determines if higher or lower PCV pressures are
required or if PCV timing can be improved to apply smoother gear change transitions. The dynamic behaviour of each clutch is
monitored and can be compensated for. The TCM will also monitor static engagement when the vehicle is stationary.

The Clutch Adaptions are initially started after a reset with drive cycles including the ability to cruise at various speeds. The
fully Clutch Adaptions are achieved gradually over many drive cycles.

The Clutch Adaptions ensure that the transmission provides smooth gear changes without slip for the life of the transmission.
The Clutch Adaptions compensate for wear providing that the Touch Adaptions were correct for the static calibration of the
transmission.

The Clutch Adaption process compensates for assembly build tolerances in the hydraulic system, mechanical tolerances of the
transmission components to include friction and electrical tolerances for example resistance and inductance. All of these can
affect the dynamic behaviour of the transmission.

The Clutch Adaptions ensure that the TCM is operating at its optimum operating parameters adjusted to suit the individual
characteristics of the transmission. The TCM to a lesser extent, also adjusts to the characteristics of the driver and vehicle.

NOTE: Some drivers and their driving style may inhibit the Clutch Adaption process, which can lead to transmission
driveability issues over a period of time.

ENGINE SPEED AND TORQUE MONITORING

The ECM constantly supplies the TCM with information on engine speed and torque through messages on the CAN powertrain
systems bus. The TCM uses this information to calculate the correct and appropriate timing of shift changes.

If the messages are not received from the ECM , the TCM will implement a back-up strategy to protect the transmission from
damage and allow the vehicle to be driven.

In the event of an engine speed or torque signal failure, the transmission will adopt the electrical limp home mode with the
transmission operating in a fixed gear.

TOWING FOR RECOVERY

WARNING: Ensure that the remote handset remains in the vehicle whilst the vehicle is being recovered. Removing the
remote handset will engage the steering lock, which will prevent the vehicle from steering correctly.

If the engine cannot be run whilst the vehicle is being recovered, there will be no power assistance for the steering or brakes.
This will result in greater effort being required to steer or slow the vehicle.

CAUTION: The vehicle should not be towed more than required to load to a trailer or recovery vehicle.

NOTES:

The recommended recovery method is by trailer or recovery vehicle.

marvelstar-store
 Where recovery to a vehicle or trailer is not possible (for example vehicle is off-road), the vehicle can be towed with all
4 wheels on the ground for a distance of up to 10 km (6.2 miles) at a speed no greater than 25 Km/h (15 mph). The Service
Park Release (SPR) procedure must be used to disengage the park lock.

Secure the towing attachment from the recovery vehicle to the front towing eye.

Ensure the remote handset is in the vehicle and switch on the ignition (power mode 6) by pressing the start/stop button once.

NOTE: Leaving the ignition switched on for extended periods will cause the battery to drain.

The Service Park Release (SPR) procedure must be used to disengage the park lock.

Release the electric park brake.

Tow the vehicle onto the trailer or recovery vehicle.

Apply the electric park brake and manually disengage the SPR, remove the pin and ensure the park lock lever is in the correct
position to engage the park lock.

Switch off the ignition (power mode 4) and remove the remote handset from the vehicle.

CAUTION: The vehicle cannot be towed in a reverse direction.

SYSTEM OPERATION

Operation of the transmission is controlled by the TCM , which electrically activates various solenoids to control the
transmission gear selection. The sequence of solenoid activation is based on programmed information in the TCM memory and
physical transmission operating conditions such as vehicle speed, throttle position, engine load and rotary TCS position.

Engine torque is transferred, via operation of combinations of clutches to the planetary gear trains. The gear trains are
controlled by reactionary inputs from brakes and clutches to produce the 9 forward gears and 1 reverse gear.

The shift elements (clutches and brakes) are actuated hydraulically. Fluid pressure is applied to the required clutch and/or
brake, pressing the plates together and allowing drive to be transmitted through the plates. The purpose of the shift elements
is to perform power-on shifts with no interruption to traction and smooth transition between gear ratios.

CONTROL DIAGRAM

NOTE: A = Hardwired; AN = High speed CAN Powertrain systems

marvelstar-store
Item Description
1 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
2 Central Junction Box (CJB)
3 Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
4 Engine Control module (ECM)
5 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module
6 Instrument cluster
7 Valve block
8 Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
9 Ground
10 Fuse - ignition supply from ignition relay
11 Ignition relay (CJB)
12 Fuse - Permanent battery supply

marvelstar-store
Published: 05-Feb-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Diagnostics Vehicles With: 9HP48 9-Speed
Automatic Transmission - AWD
Diagnosis and Testing

Principles of Operation

For a detailed description of the Automatic Transmission, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Transmission Description (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Description and
Operation).

Inspection and Verification

CAUTIONS:

Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not guarantee
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.

The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is low as internal failure can result.

When the wheels are free of the ground (for example, when the vehicle is on a lift), do not drive the vehicle in any gear
higher than 4th gear. Failure to comply with this instruction may cause DTCs to set or damage to the automatic transmission.

NOTES:

If a control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component.

When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places, and with
an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into
account.

Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.

1. Verify the customer concern

2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity

Visual Inspection
Mechanical Electrical

Fuses
Automatic transmission casing
Wiring harnesses and connectors
Automatic transmission fluid leaks
Transmission control module
Emergency park release lever
Transmission control switch

3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding
to the next step

4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index

5. Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required

Symptom Chart

Symptom Possible Causes Action

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the

powertrain control module for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC index
Engine system fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Powertrain control re-configure the powertrain control module with the latest level
Warning message: module software fault software
TRANSMISSION

marvelstar-store
 FAULT Transmission system Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
fault transmission control module for related DTCs and refer to the
Transmission control relevant DTC index
module software fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
re-configure the transmission control module with the latest level
software

Engine system fault

Powertrain control
module software not at
the latest level
Transmission system
Gearshift quality fault
GO to Pinpoint Test A.
poor Transmission control
module software not at
the latest level
Transmission adaptions
insufficient for smooth
gearshifts

Fluid Level and Condition Checks

Fluid Level Check

NOTE: The transmission fluid temperature must be between 37°C (99°F) and 45°C (113°F) whilst checking level.
Should the temperature rise above this figure, abort the check and allow the transmission fluid to cool.

This automatic transmission is not equipped with a fluid level indicator. An incorrect level may affect the transmission
operation and could result in transmission damage. For fluid level checks refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual. REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

Fluid Condition Check

Use the following procedure to check the fluid condition, which is a good indicator of the internal condition of the
transmission:

1. Check the fluid level.

2. Observe the colour and the odour of the fluid. Unused fluid is honey colored and becomes dark or blackish after the
vehicle is driven a few hundred miles.

3. Allow the fluid to drip onto a facial tissue and examine the stain.

4. A small quantity of fine debris is normal (due to normal wear). Large metal particles may indicate excessive wear or
internal damage.

Transmission Terminal Assignment

Transmission Control Module 58 Way Connector

Terminal Number Circuit Reference Description

1 GND Control module ground
3 UDRMV1 Pressure control valves power
5 VBATT Control module power
6 UDRMV2 Solenoid valves power
8 SENSOR GND Sensors ground
9 IGN Ignition status signal
10 VS_5V Sensors power (5 V)
12 VS_9V Sensors power (9 V)
13 L3 Park position sensor
15 L4 Park position sensor
17 T_OIL+ Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor signal
19 VOUT_PR Pressure sensor signal
30 T_OIL- Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor ground
31 N_T Input shaft speed sensor signal
34 HS CAN H (PT) High speed CAN high (powertrain)
35 OUT8 Park lock solenoid valve drive
36 OUT7 Dog clutch 'F' solenoid valve drive
38 OUT6 Dog clutch 'A' solenoid valve drive
39 OUT4 Torque converter pressure control valve drive

marvelstar-store
40 OUT2 Multiplate clutch 'D' pressure control valve drive
43 N_OUT Output shaft speed sensor signal
47 HS CAN L (PT) High speed CAN low (powertrain)
48 P-SIG Park lock engaged signal (output to the transmission control switch)
51 OUT9 Park lock control solenoid drive
52 OUT5 System pressure control valve drive
53 OUT3 Multiplate clutch 'E' pressure control valve drive
54 OUT0 Multiplate clutch 'B' pressure control valve drive
55 OUT1 Multiplate clutch 'C' pressure control valve drive
Transmission 26 Way Connector

Terminal Number Circuit Reference Description

1 UDRMV1 Pressure control valves power
2 OUT6 Dog clutch 'A' solenoid valve drive
3 OUT0 Multiplate clutch 'B' pressure control valve drive
4 UDRMV2 Solenoid valves power
5 OUT1 Multiplate clutch 'C' pressure control valve drive
6 OUT2 Multiplate clutch 'D' pressure control valve drive
7 OUT3 Multiplate clutch 'E' pressure control valve drive
8 OUT7 Dog clutch 'F' solenoid valve drive
9 OUT5 System pressure control valve drive
10 OUT4 Torque converter pressure control valve drive
11 OUT8 Park lock solenoid valve drive
12 OUT9 Park lock control solenoid drive
15 VS_5V Sensors power (5 V)
16 VOUT_PR Pressure sensor signal
17 SENSOR GND Sensors ground
18 L4 Park position sensor
19 L3 Park position sensor
22 N_OUT Output shaft speed sensor signal
23 N_T Input shaft speed sensor signal
24 VS_9V Sensors power (9 V)
25 T_OIL- Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor ground
26 T_OIL+ Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor signal

Routines

NOTE: Before performing any of the following routines, ensure that the manufacturer approved diagnostic system has
been updated with the latest level software.

The following routines are available:

Configure New Module - Transmission Control Module - Including Transmission Replacement

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with a new transmission control module.

The Configure New Module (Including Transmission Replacement) routine is used to configure a new transmission control
module with the latest level software and to store the vehicle identification number. This Configure New Module routine must
be performed after installing a new transmission control module and automatic transmission. After performing the Configure
New Module routine, the Transmission Control Module Adaption routine must be performed.

Configure New Module - Transmission Control Module - Without Transmission Replacement

The Configure New Module (Without Transmission Replacement) routine is used to configure a new transmission control
module with the latest level software and to store the vehicle identification number. This Configure New Module routine must
be performed after installing a new transmission control module to the existing automatic transmission. After performing the
Configure New Module routine, the Transmission Control Module Adaption routine must be performed.

Configure Existing Module - Transmission Control Module

The Configure Existing Module routine is used to re-configure the transmission control module with the latest level software.
The adaption counters will be reset to zero but the existing adaptions will be retained. After performing the Configure Existing
Module routine, it is not necessary to perform the Transmission Control Module Adaption routine.

Transmission Valve Block

marvelstar-store
The Transmission Valve Block routine is used to calibrate the transmission control module to the valve block. The
Transmission Valve Block routine must be performed after installing a new valve block. The adaption counters will be reset to
zero. After performing the Transmission Valve Block routine, the Transmission Control Module Adaption routine must be
performed.

Transmission Control Module Adaption

WARNING: The Transmission Control Module Adaption routine requires one person to drive the vehicle and another
person to monitor the progress of the routine. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.

NOTES:

The Transmission Control Module Adaption routine is also known as the Gearshift Quality Adaption routine.

Before performing the Transmission Control Module Adaption routine, ensure that any engine system faults have been
rectified.

Before performing the Transmission Control Module Adaption routine, ensure that the powertrain control module has
been configured with the latest level software.

The Transmission Control Module Adaption routine is used to teach the transmission control module the characteristics of the
automatic transmission components. The quality of the gearshifts will improve as each adaption is completed. Adaptions will
occur automatically during normal driving without the use of the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, but the process
will take longer.

The Transmission Control Module Adaption routine should be performed:

After installing a new transmission control module.

After installing a new automatic transmission.
After installing a new valve block.
If one or more of the adaption values for each gear is equal to or less than 3.

When performing the Transmission Control Module Adaption routine, it will be necessary to drive the vehicle at speeds
between 20 and 60 mph (32 and 96 kph). A suitable road test area should be identified where the vehicle can be driven,
ideally without stopping, for up to 5 miles (8 km). If a dynamic adaption cycle is interrupted (for example, by slowing down or
stopping), re-select the relevant gear and continue driving. It is not necessary to restart the routine. Before performing the
Transmission Control Module Adaption routine, drive the vehicle normally to raise the automatic transmission fluid
temperature to at least 50°C.

After driving to the road test area, perform the following steps:

1. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform routine - Transmission Control Module Adaption.

2. Dynamic adaption - Clutch E (3rd gear):

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of between 20 and 30 mph (32 and 48 kph).
2. Using command shift, select 3rd gear and drive with light throttle inputs and a steady engine speed between
1150 and 2300 rpm.
3. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, monitor the 'Engine Torque' and 'Engine Speed' displays
- Increase or decrease the throttle input as necessary to keep the values within range.
4. Monitor the 'Adaptions 1', 'Adaptions 2' and 'Adaptions 3' columns for clutch E.
5. Continue driving until a green tick is displayed in each of the three columns for clutch E.

3. Dynamic adaption - Clutch D (6th gear):

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of between 40 and 50 mph (65 and 80 kph).
2. Using command shift, select 6th gear and drive with light throttle inputs and a steady engine speed between
1150 and 2500 rpm.
3. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, monitor the 'Engine Torque' and 'Engine Speed' displays
- Increase or decrease the throttle input as necessary to keep the values within range.
4. Monitor the 'Adaptions 1', 'Adaptions 2' and 'Adaptions 3' columns for clutch D.
5. Continue driving until a green tick is displayed in each of the three columns for clutch D.

4. Dynamic adaption - Clutches C and B (7th gear):

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of between 55 and 60 mph (88 and 96 kph).
2. Using command shift, select 7th gear and drive with light throttle inputs and a steady engine speed between
1150 and 2500 rpm.
3. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, monitor the 'Engine Torque' and 'Engine Speed' displays
- Increase or decrease the throttle input as necessary to keep the values within range.
4. Monitor the 'Adaptions 1', 'Adaptions 2' and 'Adaptions 3' columns for clutches C and B.
5. Continue driving until a green tick is displayed in each of the three columns for clutch C.
6. Continue driving until a green tick is displayed in each of the three columns for clutch B.

5. Static adaptions:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Apply the brakes. Keep the brake pedal depressed until the static adaptions are complete.

marvelstar-store
 3. Set the transmission control switch to 'Drive' and wait for 5 seconds.
4. Set the transmission control switch to 'Neutral' and wait for 5 seconds.
5. Perform sub-steps 3 and 4 a total of five times.
6. Set the transmission control switch to 'Reverse' and wait for 5 seconds.
7. Set the transmission control switch to 'Neutral' and wait for 5 seconds.
8. Perform sub-steps 6 and 7 a total of five times.

Automatic Transmission Total Adaption Display

The Automatic Transmission Total Adaption Display routine is used to display the transmission adaption status. The values in
the 'Filling Count Total Adaptions' column should all be greater than 3. If any value is equal to or less than 3, perform the
Transmission Control Module Adaption routine. Gearshift quality will improve at the values increase.

Transmission Control Module Functionality Verification

WARNING: The Transmission Control Module Functionality Verification routine requires one person to drive the vehicle
and another person to monitor the progress of the routine. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.

The Transmission Control Module Functionality Verification routine is used to verify the function of the transmission during a
road test.

The Transmission Control Module Functionality Verification routine should be performed after installing a new valve block.

After completing the road test, check the transmission control module for DTCs and perform the relevant corrective actions.

Pinpoint Tests

PINPOINT TEST A : PRELIMINARY TESTS

TEST DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
CONDITIONS
A1: READ DTCS
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform routine - Read DTCs.
Are any DTCs set in the powertrain control module or the transmission control module?
Yes
Refer to the relevant DTC index and perform the relevant corrective actions.
No
GO to A2 .
A2: POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE SOFTWARE CHECK

NOTE: Before performing any routines, ensure that the manufacturer approved diagnostic system has been updated
with the latest level software.

1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check if the powertrain control module and
transmission control module are configured with the latest level software.
Are the powertrain control module and transmission control module configured with the latest level software?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, re-configure the powertrain control module and/or the
transmission control module with the latest level software as necessary. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
PINPOINT TEST B : AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ADAPTION ASSESSMENT

TEST DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
CONDITIONS
B1: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TOTAL ADAPTION DISPLAY
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform routine - Automatic Transmission Total
Adaption Display.
2 Check the values in the 'Filling Count Total Adaptions' column.
Are any of the adaption values less than 3?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test C.
No
Contact dealer technical support.
PINPOINT TEST C : TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE ADAPTION ROUTINE

TEST DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
CONDITIONS
C1: TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE ADAPTION ROUTINE

marvelstar-store
 WARNING: The Transmission Control Module Adaption routine requires one person to drive the vehicle
and another person to monitor the progress of the routine. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.

NOTE: For further information, refer to the section above entitled 'Transmission Control Module Adaption'.

1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform routine - Transmission Control Module
Adaption.
Did the Transmission Control Module Adaption routine complete successfully (all adaption values equal to or
greater than 3)?
Yes
Repair complete.
No
Repair complete. Customer explanation: Explain to the customer that the Transmission adaption process is
an expected behaviour and will adapt during normal customer driving over a period of time. This is the
same condition in which new vehicle are sold and handed over to customers. There is no specific time
frame for the adaption process to be complete and may change due to the customer driving conditions and
environment conditions.

DTC Index

For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00. REFER to:
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Control Module (TCM) (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).

Published: 29-Sep-2016
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Transmission
Control Module (TCM)
Description and Operation

Transmission Control Module (TCM)

CAUTIONS:

Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not guarantee
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.

Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when carrying out repairs to the transmission or transmission components.

NOTES:

If a control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component.

Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the scan tool
to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read by the
manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).

When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places, and with
an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into
account.

Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.

Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.

If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be the
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.

marvelstar-store
 Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required.

The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Transmission Control Module (TCM). For
additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop manual. For
additional information, refer to: Diagnostics - Vehicles With: 9HP48 9-Speed Automatic Transmission - AWD (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Diagnosis and Testing).

DTC Description Possible Causes Action

Engine speed
Engine Overspeed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
has exceeded
P0219-64 Condition - Signal engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
the maximum
plausibility failure relevant DTC index
plausible speed

Vehicle Speed Missing/invalid

Sensor A Circuit data from the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
P0501-64 Range/Performance anti-lock brake anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
- Signal plausibility system control refer to the relevant DTC index
failure module

Missing/invalid
Vehicle Speed
data from the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Sensor A Circuit
P0501-86 anti-lock brake anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
Range/Performance
system control refer to the relevant DTC index
- Signal invalid
module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with
reference - VBATT /
a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
GND -
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
System Voltage control module
P0561-62 Unstable - Signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
power or ground
compare failure transmission control module power and ground circuits for
circuit open
open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
circuit, high
necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - VBATT /
GND - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer
System Voltage Transmission to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the transmission
Low - Circuit control module
P0562-1C control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
voltage out of power or ground resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
range circuit open Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
circuit, high check the battery and charging system
resistance
Battery/charging
system fault

NOTE: Circuit
reference - VBATT /
GND - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer
System Voltage Transmission to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the transmission
Low - Signal control module
P0562-21 control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
amplitude < power or ground resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
minimum circuit open Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
circuit, high check the battery and charging system
resistance
Battery/charging
system fault

System Voltage Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check

High - Signal datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer

marvelstar-store
P0563-22 amplitude > Battery/charging to the relevant section of the workshop manual and check the
maximum system fault battery and charging system

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Serial perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Communication
P0600-04 control module
Link - System
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failures
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Internal Control perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Module Memory Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0601-41 Checksum Error - control module
General checksum internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
failure re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Internal Control perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Module Read Only Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0605-41 Memory (ROM) control module
Error - General internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
checksum failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Module Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0606-04 Processor - System control module
internal failures internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Module Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0606-62 Processor - Signal control module
compare failure internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Module Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0606-64 Processor - Signal control module
plausibility failure internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

Internal Control NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Module Monitoring perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Processor
P060A-04 control module
Performance -
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
System internal
failures DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
TCM Processor - Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0613-04 System internal control module
failures internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
TCM Processor - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Watchdog/safety
P0613-47 control module
microcontroller
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
failure
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_T /
N_OUT / SENSOR GND
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
-
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Input shaft
speed sensor
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
circuit short
datalogger signal - Turbine Speed (0x1E72). Refer to the
circuit to
electrical circuit diagrams and check the input shaft speed
ground, short
Internal Control sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
circuit to power,
Module Vehicle open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
P062C-86 open circuit,
Speed Performance install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance
- Signal invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Output shaft
datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
speed sensor
(0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit short
output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
circuit to
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
ground, short
wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
circuit to power,
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
open circuit,
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
high resistance
transmission control module
Transmission
control module
internal failure

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Internal Control perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Module EEPROM
P062F-04 control module
Error - System
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failures
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

Transmission
control module
previously NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
VIN Not installed on perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Programmed or another vehicle Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0631-62 Incompatible - TCM New
- Signal compare transmission Install the original or a new transmission control module as
failure control module necessary
installed and Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, configure
VIN not yet the transmission control module as a new module
programmed

NOTE: Circuit
reference - UDRMV1 /
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
UDRMV2 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure control
valves power
Actuator Supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
circuit open
Voltage A control valves power circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
P0657-13 circuit, high
Circuit/Open - Repair the wiring harness as necessary
resistance
Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the solenoid
Solenoid valves
valves power circuit for open circuit, high resistance. Repair
power circuit
the wiring harness as necessary
open circuit,
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - VS_9V / perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
SENSOR GND - Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Sensor Reference
Voltage A Circuit
Automatic Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
Range/Performance
P06A6-01 transmission transmission sensor power and ground circuits for open circuit,
- General electrical
sensor power or high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
failure
ground circuit Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
open circuit, DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
high resistance transmission control module
Transmission
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - VS_5V /
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Sensor Reference Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Voltage B Circuit transmission
P06A7-01 Range/Performance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
sensor power or
- General electrical transmission sensor power and ground circuits for open circuit,
ground circuit
failure high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
open circuit,
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

Transmission NOTE: This DTC is for event information only and does not
Control System indicate a fault.
Transmission
P0700-02 (MIL Request) -
fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
General signal
failure other transmission related DTCs and perform the relevant
corrective actions

Transmission
Control System
Transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Range/Performance
P0701-98 cooling system check the transmission cooling system. Using the manufacturer
- Component or
fault approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest
system over
temperature

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Transmission perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Control System
P0702-04 control module
Electrical - System
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failures
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Transmission perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control System Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0702-06 Electrical - control module
Algorithm based internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
failures re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTES:

NOTE: Circuit
reference - T_OIL+ / Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance
T_OIL- - specification is 1 kΩ at 25°C.

Automatic
transmission After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Transmission Fluid routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
fluid
Temperature Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
temperature
Sensor A Circuit -
P0710-27 sensor circuit
short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
datalogger signal - Transmission Oil Temperature (0x1E69).

marvelstar-store
 Signal rate of ground, short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
change above circuit to power, transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
threshold open circuit, ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
high resistance Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
Transmission necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTES:

NOTE: Circuit
Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance
reference - T_OIL+ /
specification is 1 kΩ at 25°C.
T_OIL- -

Automatic
transmission After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Transmission Fluid fluid routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Temperature temperature Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0710-64 Sensor A Circuit - sensor circuit
Signal plausibility short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
failure ground, short datalogger signal - Transmission Oil Temperature (0x1E69).
circuit to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
open circuit, transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
high resistance ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
Transmission Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
control module necessary
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTES:

Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance

NOTE: Circuit specification is 1 kΩ at 25°C.
reference - T_OIL+ /
T_OIL- -
After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Transmission Fluid Automatic routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Temperature transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0712-11 Sensor A Circuit fluid
Low - Circuit short temperature Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
to ground sensor circuit datalogger signal - Transmission Oil Temperature (0x1E69).
short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
ground transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
Transmission ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
control module Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
internal failure necessary
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTES:

Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance

NOTE: Circuit specification is 1 kΩ at 25°C.
reference - T_OIL+ /
T_OIL- -
After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Automatic routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Fluid transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Temperature fluid
P0713-13
Sensor A Circuit temperature Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
High - Circuit open sensor circuit datalogger signal - Transmission Oil Temperature (0x1E69).
open circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
high resistance transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
Transmission ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
control module Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
internal failure necessary
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - N_T / perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
SENSOR GND - Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Input/Turbine Input shaft Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Shaft Speed speed sensor datalogger signal - Turbine Speed (0x1E72). Refer to the
P0715-12 Sensor A Circuit - circuit short electrical circuit diagrams and check the input shaft speed
Circuit short to circuit to sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
battery ground, short open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
circuit to power, install a new sensor unit as necessary
open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_T / NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Input/Turbine Input shaft
Shaft Speed speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Sensor A Circuit circuit short datalogger signal - Turbine Speed (0x1E72). Refer to the
P0716-64 circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the input shaft speed
Range/Performance
- Signal plausibility ground, short sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
failure circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
open circuit, install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_T / NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Input/Turbine Input shaft
Shaft Speed speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Sensor A Circuit No circuit short datalogger signal - Turbine Speed (0x1E72). Refer to the
P0717-14 circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the input shaft speed
Signal - Circuit
short to ground or ground, short sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
open circuit, install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Transmission Mode Automatic transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
P071A-07 Switch A Circuit - transmission Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Mechanical failures internal failure
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and perform a road test using all gears. If the fault
persists, install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

NOTE: Circuit perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
reference - N_OUT / Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
SENSOR GND -
Output Shaft Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Speed Sensor Output shaft datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
P0720-12 speed sensor (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Circuit - Circuit
short to battery circuit short output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to power.
circuit to power Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
Transmission necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - N_OUT / perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
SENSOR GND - Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Output Shaft Output shaft
Speed Sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
speed sensor datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
Circuit circuit short
P0721-02 (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Range/Performance circuit to
- General signal output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
ground, short short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
failure circuit to power, wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
open circuit, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_OUT / NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Output Shaft Output shaft
Speed Sensor speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Circuit circuit short datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
P0721-64 circuit to (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Range/Performance
- Signal plausibility ground, short output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
failure circuit to power, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
open circuit, wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - N_OUT /
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
SENSOR GND -
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Output Shaft Output shaft

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Speed Sensor speed sensor
datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
P0722-14 Circuit No Signal - circuit short
(0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Circuit short to circuit to
output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
ground or open ground, open
open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
circuit, high
install a new sensor unit as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

Engine Speed Input

Circuit - Value of Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Engine system
P0725-83 signal protection engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
fault
calculation relevant DTC index
incorrect

NOTE: This DTC is always accompanied by other DTCs which

Stuck in Neutral - Automatic indicate which component is affected.
P072A-63 Circuit/component transmission
protection time-out internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
other transmission related DTCs and perform the relevant
corrective actions

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Stuck in Gear 4 -
P072F-07 transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures
internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with
a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Incorrect Gear Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
P0730-00 Ratio - No sub type transmission
information Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Unable to Engage Automatic
P073E-07 Reverse - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

Torque a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
converter transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
pressure control Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
valve solenoid
circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the torque
Torque Converter circuit to converter pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
Clutch Circuit ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
P0741-07 Performance/Stuck circuit to power, resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Off - Mechanical open circuit, as necessary
failures high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Torque DTCs and perform a road test using all gears. If the fault
converter or persists, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
automatic and check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition:
transmission - Automatic transmission fluid normal: Install a new torque
internal failure converter
- Automatic transmission fluid dirty or contaminated:
Install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Unable to Engage Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P074C-24 Gear 4 - Signal transmission check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
stuck high internal failure Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new valve body and drain and refill the automatic
transmission fluid. Clear the DTCs and perform a road test
using all gears. If the fault persists, install a new automatic
transmission

Output shaft
speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Output Speed
circuit short datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
Sensor Circuit -
circuit to (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
P077B-92 Direction Error -
ground, short output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
Performance or
circuit to power, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
incorrect operation
open circuit, wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance

Transmission Fluid
Temperature NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
Measurement perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
System - Multiple Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

marvelstar-store
P077E-64 Sensor Correlation Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
- Signal plausibility control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
failure internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Error - Signal
P0780-62 control module
compare failure
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Error - No
P0780-93 control module
operation
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Shift Error - Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0780-94 Unexpected control module
operation internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Engine system Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure Control fault
Solenoid C - Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
P0795-04 engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
System internal control module
failures is not configured relevant DTC index
correctly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - L3 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Park Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Position Park position
Sensor/Switch A sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
P07B3-11
Circuit Low - short circuit to position sensor circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair the
Circuit short to ground wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
ground Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - L3 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Park Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Park position
Position sensor circuit
Sensor/Switch A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
P07B4-15 short circuit to
Circuit High - position sensor circuit for short circuit to power, open circuit,
power, open
Circuit short to high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit, high
battery or open sensor unit as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

NOTE: Circuit
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
reference - L4 -
Transmission Park Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Position

marvelstar-store
P07B9-11 Sensor/Switch B Park position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
Circuit Low - sensor circuit position sensor circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair the
Circuit short to short circuit to wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
ground ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - L4 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Park Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Park position
Position sensor circuit
Sensor/Switch B Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
P07BA-15 short circuit to
Circuit High - position sensor circuit for short circuit to power, open circuit,
power, open
Circuit short to high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit, high
battery or open sensor unit as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check the automatic transmission serial number:

Transmission Mode Automatic - Serial number is less than 91782: Install a new
P07D4-07 Switch F Circuit - transmission automatic transmission
Mechanical failures internal failure - Serial number is greater than 91781: Refer to the
relevant section of the workshop manual and check the
automatic transmission fluid level. Rectify any fluid leaks
and top up as necessary. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, re-configure the
transmission control module with the latest level
software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Gear 8 Incorrect Automatic
P07D9-07 Ratio - Mechanical transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07DC-07 from Gear 1 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07DD-07 from Gear 2 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and

marvelstar-store
 perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07DE-07 from Gear 3 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07DF-07 from Gear 4 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

Engine system NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

fault a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Accessory drive transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
belt components Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
incorrectly
installed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Driveline engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
imbalance relevant DTC index
Driveline Check the installation of the accessory drive belt components
Incorrect Shift components Check the driveline for debris around rotating components
P07E0-07 from Gear 5 - excessively Check the driveline for excessive wear or backlash
Mechanical failures worn Check the wheels and tires for snow or mud packing and
Wheel/tire correct balance
imbalance Check the engine mounts for damage
Engine mount Check the transmission mounts for damage
damaged Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Transmission check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
mount damaged Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
Automatic manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
transmission perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
internal failure a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07E1-07 from Gear 6 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Incorrect Shift Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P07E2-07 from Gear 7 - transmission check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Mechanical failures internal failure Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the

marvelstar-store
 manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

Engine system NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

fault a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Accessory drive transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
belt components Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
incorrectly
installed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Driveline engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
imbalance relevant DTC index
Driveline Check the installation of the accessory drive belt components
Incorrect Shift components Check the driveline for debris around rotating components
P07E3-07 from Gear 8 - excessively Check the driveline for excessive wear or backlash
Mechanical failures worn Check the wheels and tires for snow or mud packing and
Wheel/tire correct balance
imbalance Check the engine mounts for damage
Engine mount Check the transmission mounts for damage
damaged Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Transmission check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
mount damaged Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
Automatic manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
transmission perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
internal failure a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the

DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
(5.5Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
Park position ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
Unable to Engage sensor valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
P07E4-64 Park - Signal mountings loose in the Removal Instructions referenced below).For additional
plausibility failure Valve block information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
internal failure Transmission/Transaxle)
Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
SULEV (Removal and Installation),
Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check the automatic transmission serial number:

Automatic - Serial number is less than 81206: Install a new
Stuck in Drive - automatic transmission
P07E7-07 transmission
Mechanical failures - Serial number is greater than 81205: Refer to the
internal failure
relevant section of the workshop manual and check the
automatic transmission fluid level. Rectify any fluid leaks
and top up as necessary. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, re-configure the
transmission control module with the latest level
software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Gear 9 Incorrect
P07F6-07 Ratio - Mechanical

marvelstar-store
 failures Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
transmission check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07FA-07 From Gear 9 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Reverse Inhibit
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Control
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P0801-94 Circuit/Open -
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
Unexpected
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
operation
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for

other park lock related DTCs and perform the relevant
corrective actions
NOTE: Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
reference - P-SIG - engaged signal circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
Park lock fault harness as necessary
Park lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
engaged signal DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
circuit short position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Park/Neutral circuit to (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Switch Output ground, short position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
P084F-29
Circuit - Signal circuit to power, ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
invalid open circuit, valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
high resistance in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
Park position tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
sensor additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
mountings loose Transmission/Transaxle)
Transmission Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
control module SULEV (Removal and Installation),
internal failure Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

marvelstar-store
 Check parklock mechanism by engaging and disengaging the
NOTE: Circuit parking lock several times. Check that the service park release
reference - L3 / L4 - lever is in the normal position
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
Service park position sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
release lever in to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
release position harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
Park position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
sensor circuit solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
ground, short or install a new solenoid as necessary
Park/Neutral
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Switch Input
P0850-29 open circuit, DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Circuit - Signal
high resistance position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
invalid
Park lock (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
solenoid circuit position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
short circuit to ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
ground, short valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
circuit to power, in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
open circuit, tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
high resistance additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
Park position Transmission/Transaxle)
sensor Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
mountings loose SULEV (Removal and Installation),
Park lock Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
mechanical and Installation).
failure The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Multiple Gears Automatic
P0893-07 Engaged - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - VOUT_PR -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure sensor
Hydraulic Pressure signal circuit
Sensor Circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
P0932-14 short circuit to
Circuit short to sensor signal circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
ground, open
ground or open high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit, high
pressure sensor as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - VOUT_PR -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Hydraulic Pressure Pressure sensor
Sensor signal circuit
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
P0933-62 Range/Performance short circuit to
sensor signal circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
- Signal compare ground, open
high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
failure circuit, high
pressure sensor as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

marvelstar-store
 Hydraulic Pressure NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
Sensor Circuit High reference - VOUT_PR - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
P0935-12 - Circuit short to Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure sensor
battery
signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
short circuit to sensor signal circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the
power wiring harness or install a new pressure sensor as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Hydraulic Pressure Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Sensor Circuit Automatic
P0936-64 Intermittent - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Signal plausibility internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
failure Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Hydraulic Pressure Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0942-62 Unit - Signal control module
compare failure internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT5 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure Control System pressure
Solenoid A Control control valve Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the system
P0962-11 Circuit Low - solenoid circuit pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to short circuit to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid as
ground ground necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT5 - NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
System pressure Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure Control control valve
Solenoid A Control solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the system
P0963-15 Circuit High - short circuit to pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to power, open power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
battery or open circuit, high or install a new solenoid as necessary
resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT6 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Dog clutch 'A'
Shift Solenoid A solenoid circuit
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the dog
P0973-14 short circuit to
- Circuit short to clutch 'A' solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, open
ground, open
ground or open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a
circuit, high
new solenoid as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT6 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Shift Solenoid A Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Control Circuit High Dog clutch 'A'
P0974-12 solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the dog
- Circuit short to
battery short circuit to clutch 'A' solenoid circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the
power wiring harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT0 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid B Multiplate clutch
Control Circuit 'B' pressure
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0975-19 Range/Performance control valve
clutch 'B' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
- Circuit current solenoid circuit
to power. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid as
above threshold short circuit to
necessary
power
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT0 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid B 'B' pressure
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0976-11 control valve
- Circuit short to clutch 'B' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
solenoid circuit
ground to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
short circuit to
as necessary
ground
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT0 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Multiplate clutch
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
'B' pressure
Shift Solenoid B control valve
Control Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the Multiplate
P0977-15 solenoid circuit
- Circuit short to clutch 'B' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
short circuit to
battery or open to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
power, open
harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
circuit, high
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT1 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid C Multiplate clutch
Control Circuit 'C' pressure
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0978-19 Range/Performance control valve
clutch 'C' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
- Circuit current solenoid circuit
to power. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid as
above threshold short circuit to
necessary
power
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT1 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid C 'C' pressure

marvelstar-store
P0979-11 Control Circuit Low control valve Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
- Circuit short to solenoid circuit clutch 'C' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
ground short circuit to to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
ground as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT1 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Multiplate clutch
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
'C' pressure
Shift Solenoid C control valve
Control Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0980-15 solenoid circuit
- Circuit short to clutch 'C' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
short circuit to
battery or open to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
power, open
harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
circuit, high
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT2 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid D Multiplate clutch
Control Circuit 'D' pressure
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0981-19 Range/Performance control valve
clutch 'D' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
- Circuit current solenoid circuit
circuit to power. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
above threshold short circuit to
solenoid as necessary
power
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT2 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid D 'D' pressure
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0982-11 control valve
- Circuit short to clutch 'D' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
solenoid circuit
ground circuit to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
short circuit to
solenoid as necessary
ground
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT2 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Multiplate clutch
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
'D' pressure
Shift Solenoid D control valve
Control Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0983-15 solenoid circuit
- Circuit short to clutch 'D' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
short circuit to
battery or open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
power, open
harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
circuit, high
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

NOTE: Circuit perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
reference - OUT3 - Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid E 'E' pressure
Control Circuit control valve

marvelstar-store
P0984-19 Range/Performance solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
- Circuit current short circuit to clutch 'E' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
above threshold power to power. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid as
Transmission necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT3 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid E 'E' pressure
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0985-11 control valve
- Circuit short to clutch 'E' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
solenoid circuit
ground to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
short circuit to
as necessary
ground
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT3 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Multiplate clutch
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
'E' pressure
Shift Solenoid E control valve
Control Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0986-15 solenoid circuit
- Circuit short to clutch 'E' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
short circuit to
battery or open to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
power, open
harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
circuit, high
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT7 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Dog clutch 'F'
Shift Solenoid F solenoid circuit
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the dog
P0998-14 short circuit to
- Circuit short to clutch 'F' solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, open
ground, open
ground or open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a
circuit, high
new solenoid as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT7 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid F Dog clutch 'F'
Control Circuit High solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the dog
P0999-12
- Circuit short to short circuit to clutch 'F' solenoid circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the
battery power wiring harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT8 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
Park lock perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
solenoid circuit Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid G short circuit to
Control Circuit Low ground, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
P099B-14 circuit, high solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
- Circuit short to
ground or open resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
as necessary

marvelstar-store
 Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT8 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid G Park lock
Control Circuit High solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
P099C-12
- Circuit short to short circuit to solenoid circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the wiring
battery power harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT9 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Park lock control
Shift Solenoid H solenoid circuit
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
P099E-14 short circuit to
- Circuit short to control solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
ground, open
ground or open high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit, high
solenoid as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT9 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid H Park lock control
Control Circuit High solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
P099F-12
- Circuit short to short circuit to control solenoid circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the
battery power wiring harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

Internal Control
Engine system
Module Start-Stop Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
fault
P164C-62 Performance - engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
- Stop/start
Signal compare relevant DTC index
system
failure

Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park

position sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
NOTE: Circuit DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
reference - L3 / L4 - position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
(6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Park position position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
High Vehicle Speed sensor circuit ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
Observed in Park - short circuit to valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
P1706-94 ground, short
Unexpected in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
operation circuit to power, tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
open circuit, additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
high resistance Transmission/Transaxle)
Park position Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
sensor SULEV (Removal and Installation),
mountings loose Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

marvelstar-store
 Check that the service park release lever is in the normal
NOTE: Circuit position
reference - OUT8 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Service park power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
release lever in or install a new solenoid as necessary
release position Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transfer Case Park lock DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Neutral or solenoid circuit position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Park/Neutral short circuit to (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Indication Circuit - ground, short position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
P1707-72
Actuator stuck circuit to power, ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
open open circuit, valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
high resistance in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
Park position tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
sensor additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
mountings loose Transmission/Transaxle)
Park lock Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
mechanical SULEV (Removal and Installation),
failure Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check that the service park release lever is in the normal

position
NOTE: Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
reference - OUT8 - solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
Service park or install a new solenoid as necessary
release lever in Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
release position DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Park lock position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Transfer Case solenoid circuit (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Neutral or short circuit to position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
P1707-74 Park/Neutral ground, short ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
Indication Circuit - circuit to power, valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
Actuator slipping open circuit, in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
high resistance tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
Park position additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
sensor Transmission/Transaxle)
mountings loose Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
Park lock SULEV (Removal and Installation),
mechanical Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
failure and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check that the service park release lever is in the normal

NOTE: Circuit position
reference - OUT8 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
Service park power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
release lever in or install a new solenoid as necessary
release position Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Park lock DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Transfer Case solenoid circuit position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Neutral or short circuit to (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Park/Neutral ground, short position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
P1707-77 Indication Circuit - circuit to power, ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
Commanded open circuit, valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
position not high resistance in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
reachable tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For

marvelstar-store
 Park position additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
sensor Transmission/Transaxle)
mountings loose Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
Park lock SULEV (Removal and Installation),
mechanical Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
failure and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Transmission
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Control Module
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P1710-86 Solenoid/Internal
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
Ground Circuit -
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
Signal invalid
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

Missing/invalid NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

data from the perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
anti-lock brake Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
system control
module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Output shaft anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
Output Shaft
speed sensor refer to the relevant DTC index
Speed / ABS Wheel
circuit short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
P174E-62 Speed Correlation -
circuit to datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
Signal compare
ground, short (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
failure
circuit to power, output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
open circuit, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
high resistance wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Pressure Solenoid
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Control System
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P1758-19 Incorrect Current -
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
Circuit current
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
above threshold
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
One or more Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
automatic
transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
solenoid circuits other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Pressure Solenoid corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to
Control System check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
ground, short
P1758-62 Incorrect Current - circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
circuit to power,
Signal compare resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
open circuit,
failure as necessary
high resistance

marvelstar-store
 Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Clutch Solenoid
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P1770-04 Circuit - System
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
internal failures
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Automatic
Friction Element B Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P177F-07 transmission
or D - Mechanical check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Automatic
Friction Element B Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P178A-07 transmission
or E - Mechanical check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Automatic
Friction Element C Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P178C-07 transmission
or E - Mechanical check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Automatic
Friction Element D Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P178D-07 transmission
or E - Mechanical check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Clutch Control short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
System ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

marvelstar-store
P181F-18 Performance - circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
Circuit current open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
below threshold high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P2544-86 Request Input control module
Signal A - Signal internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
invalid re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Request Input
P2545-86 control module
Signal A Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
internal failure
Range/Performance re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
- Signal invalid level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P2546-86 Request Input control module
Signal A Low - internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Signal invalid re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P2547-86 Request Input control module
Signal A High - internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Signal invalid re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P2638-86 Feedback Signal A control module
Range/Performance internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
- Signal invalid re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Transmission transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Friction Element B Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Apply Time
P2701-07 transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Range/Performance
internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
- Mechanical
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

Transmission a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Friction Element C transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Apply Time Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

marvelstar-store
 Range/Performance Automatic
P2702-07 Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
- Mechanical transmission
failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Transmission transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Friction Element D Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Apply Time
P2703-07 transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Range/Performance
internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
- Mechanical
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Transmission Check the automatic transmission serial number:

Friction Element E - Serial number is less than 63584: Install a new
Automatic
Apply Time automatic transmission
P2704-07 transmission
Range/Performance - Serial number is greater than 63583: Refer to the
internal failure
- Mechanical relevant section of the workshop manual and check the
failures automatic transmission fluid level. Rectify any fluid leaks
and top up as necessary. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, re-configure the
transmission control module with the latest level
software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for

other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
One or more circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
automatic resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
transmission as necessary
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
short circuit to DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Unexpected ground, short position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Mechanical Gear circuit to power, (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
P2711-94 Disengagement - open circuit, position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
Unexpected high resistance ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
operation Park position valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
sensor in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
mountings loose tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
Transmission additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
control module Transmission/Transaxle)
internal failure Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
SULEV (Removal and Installation),
Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT4 -

marvelstar-store
 Torque
Torque Converter converter NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
Clutch Pressure pressure control perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Solenoid valve solenoid
P2763-15 Control Circuit High Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
circuit short
- Circuit short to circuit to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the torque
battery or open open circuit, converter pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
high resistance circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
Transmission harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT4 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Torque Converter Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Torque
Clutch Pressure converter
Control Solenoid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the torque
P2764-11 pressure control
Control Circuit Low converter pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
valve solenoid
- Circuit short to circuit to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit short
ground solenoid as necessary
circuit to ground
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTES:

This DTC may be induced by the driver using the paddle

switches excessively.

Paddle switch
fault This DTC may be induced by a paddle switch fault that causes
Clutch Automatic excessive gear shifts.
Temperature Too transmission
P2787-4B
High - Over fluid level low Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
temperature Transmission paddle switch related DTCs and perform the relevant corrective
cooling system actions
fault Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
check the transmission cooling system. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Gear Shift Direction short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Circuit - ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P2793-94
Unexpected circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
operation open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

Invalid data
High Speed CAN received from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Communication another control snapshot data to determine the invalid data source control
U0001-81
Bus - Invalid serial module via the module. Check the relevant control module for related DTCs
data received high speed CAN and refer to the relevant DTC index
bus (powertrain)

High Speed CAN

Communication Invalid data
Bus - received from
another control
U0001-82 module via the

marvelstar-store
 Alive/sequence high speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
counter incorrect / bus (powertrain) snapshot data to determine the invalid data source control
not updated module. Check the relevant control module for related DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC index

High Speed CAN Invalid data

Communication received from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Bus - Value of another control snapshot data to determine the invalid data source control
U0001-83
signal protection module via the module. Check the relevant control module for related DTCs
calculation high speed CAN and refer to the relevant DTC index
incorrect bus (powertrain)

Invalid signal
received from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
High Speed CAN
another control snapshot data to determine the invalid signal source control
U0001-86 Communication
module via the module. Check the relevant control module for related DTCs
Bus - Signal invalid
high speed CAN and refer to the relevant DTC index
bus (powertrain)

Missing message
High Speed CAN from another Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Communication control module snapshot data to determine the missing message source
U0001-87
Bus - Missing via the high control module. Check the relevant control module for related
message speed CAN bus DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
(powertrain)

Engine control
module power
or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the engine
open circuit, control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
Control Module
bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Communication
U0073-00 circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
Bus A Off - No sub
circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
type information
ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
open circuit, engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
high resistance relevant DTC index
Engine system
fault

Engine control
module power
or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the engine
open circuit, control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
Lost
bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Communication
U0100-87 circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
With ECM/PCM A -
circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Missing message
ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
open circuit, engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
high resistance relevant DTC index
Engine system
fault

Anti-lock brake
system control
module power
or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the anti-lock
open circuit, brake system control module power and ground circuits for
high resistance open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
Lost High speed CAN necessary
Communication bus (powertrain) Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
With Anti-Lock circuit short CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
U0121-87 Brake System circuit to diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
(ABS) Control ground, short circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Module - Missing
circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
message

marvelstar-store
 circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
open circuit, anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
high resistance refer to the relevant DTC index
Anti-lock brake
system fault

Car NOTE: After updating the car configuration file, set the ignition
configuration file to on and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs.
Internal Control mismatch with
Module Software vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
U0300-00 Incompatibility - specification and up-date the car configuration file as necessary. Clear the
No sub type Transmission DTCs and retest
information control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
is not configured re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
correctly level software

NOTES:

Car After updating the car configuration file, set the ignition to on
configuration file and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs.
mismatch with
Software vehicle
Incompatibility specification After installing a new transmission control module, perform
with Transmission Transmission routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
U0302-57 Control Module - control module Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Invalid/incomplete is not configured
software correctly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
component Incorrect and up-date the car configuration file as necessary. Clear the
transmission DTCs and retest
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
installed re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software
Install a new transmission control module as necessary

Invalid Data
Missing/invalid
Received From Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
data from the
U0401-02 ECM/PCM A - engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
engine control
General signal relevant DTC index
module
failure

Invalid Data
Missing/invalid
Received From Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
data from the
U0401-64 ECM/PCM A - engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
engine control
Signal plausibility relevant DTC index
module
failure

Invalid Data
Missing/invalid
Received From Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
data from the
U0401-67 ECM/PCM A - engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
engine control
Signal incorrect relevant DTC index
module
after event
Invalid Data
Received From Missing/invalid
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
ECM/PCM A - data from the
U0401-82 engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
Alive/sequence engine control
relevant DTC index
counter incorrect / module
not updated
Invalid Data
Received From Missing/invalid
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
ECM/PCM A - Value data from the
U0401-83 engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
of signal protection engine control
relevant DTC index
calculation module
incorrect

Invalid Data
Received From NOTE: This DTC is set when the automatic transmission output
Missing/invalid shaft speed rate of change is implausible. This can occur if the brakes
Anti-Lock Brake
data from the lock during braking because of an anti-lock brake system fault.
System (ABS)
U0415-27 anti-lock brake
Control Module -
system control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Signal rate of
module anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
change above
threshold refer to the relevant DTC index

marvelstar-store
 Anti-lock brake
system control
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the anti-lock
module power
brake system control module power and ground circuits for
or ground circuit
Invalid Data open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
open circuit,
Received From necessary
high resistance
Anti-Lock Brake Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
High speed CAN
System (ABS) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
U0415-82 Control Module - bus (powertrain)
diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
circuit short
Alive/sequence circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit to
counter incorrect / circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
ground, short
not updated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
circuit to power,
anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
open circuit,
refer to the relevant DTC index
high resistance
Anti-lock brake
system fault

Anti-lock brake
system control
module power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the anti-lock
or ground circuit brake system control module power and ground circuits for
Invalid Data
open circuit, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
Received From
high resistance necessary
Anti-Lock Brake
High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
System (ABS)
bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
U0415-83 Control Module -
circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
Value of signal
circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
protection
ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
calculation
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
incorrect
open circuit, anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
high resistance refer to the relevant DTC index
Anti-lock brake
system fault

NOTE: Circuit
reference - IGN -

Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the

Invalid Data data from the central junction box for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Received From central junction DTC index
U0422-86 Body Control box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the ignition
Module - Signal Ignition signal signal circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
invalid circuit short open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
circuit to necessary
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance

NOTES:

Transmission After updating the car configuration file, set the ignition to on
control module and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs.
is not configured
correctly
Control Module Car After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Configuration configuration file routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
U2101-56 Incompatible - mismatch with Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Invalid/incomplete vehicle
configuration specification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Incorrect re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
transmission level software
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
installed and up-date the car configuration file as necessary. Clear the
DTCs and retest
Install a new transmission control module as necessary

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Mis-match perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
between Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
Control Module -
control module
U3000-56 Invalid/incomplete

marvelstar-store
 configuration configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, configure
and valve block the transmission control module as a new module. Perform
specification routine - Transmission Valve Block. Clear the DTCs and retest.
If the fault persists, install a new transmission control module

Control Module -
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Component or Engine system
U3000-9A engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
system operating fault
relevant DTC index
conditions

Published: 09-Jul-2015
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Description
Description and Operation

COMPONENT LOCATION

Item Description
1 Paddle switches - upshift / downshift
2 Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
3 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
4 ZF 9HP48 Automatic transmission

marvelstar-store
 5 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) cooler with integrated thermostat

OVERVIEW

The ZF 9HP48 automatic transmission is a 9 speed, electronically controlled unit manufactured by ZF. The transmission
represents the latest in automatic transmission technology for a transverse, AWD (all-wheel drive) unit. The transmission
features lock-up slip control, 'CommandShift™' functions and automatic and driver selectable modes to give the optimum on
and off road performance.

The automatic transmission is controlled by a TCM (transmission control module) which contains software to provide operation
as a semi-automatic 'CommandShift™' transmission. Driver selections for P, R, N, D and S on the rotary TCS (transmission
control switch) are received by the TCM . The TCM operates solenoid valves and clutches to control transmission gear shifts,
allowing the system to operate as a 'shift by wire' system, with no mechanical link to the transmission for drive selections.

The TCM allows the transmission to be operated as a conventional automatic unit by selecting P, R, N, D, S on the TCS .
Rotation of the TCS to the 'S' position puts the transmission into electronic 'Sport' mode. Operation of the steering wheel
mounted + or – paddle switches puts the transmission into electronic manual 'CommandShift™' mode.
For additional information, refer to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls,
Description and Operation).

The ZF 9HP48 transmission has the following features:

Designed to be maintenance free

Transmission fluid is fill for life
The torque converter features a controlled slip feature with electronically regulated lock-up control on gears 1 to 9
Planetary gearset with 9 speeds, 4 planetary geartrains, and 6 shift elements
Wide transmission ratio spread with small ratio steps
The first-ever use of interlocking dog clutches in a passenger car automatic transmission
Shift programs controlled by the TCM
TCM has an adaptive capability to ensure efficient gear shift quality throughout the service life of the transmission
Diagnostics available from the TCM via the high speed CAN (controller area network) Powertrain systems bus.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

The transmission comprises the main casing which houses all of the transmission components. The torque converter is located
in a separate converter housing, bolted to the main casing.

ZF 9HP48 Cut-Away View

marvelstar-store
ZF 9HP48 Sectional View

marvelstar-store
Item Description
1 Fluid pan
2 Valve block
3 Planetary gear set 4
4 Planetary gear set 3
5 Planetary gear set 2
6 Planetary gear set 1
7 Dog clutch A

marvelstar-store
 8 Spur pinion
9 Park interlock gear
10 Multiplate clutch 'B'
11 Multiplate brake 'C'
12 Multiplate brake 'D'
13 Left splined output shaft (connection to halfshaft)
14 Right splined output shaft (connection to Power Transfer Unit (PTU))
15 Right splined output shaft (connection to halfshaft)
16 Differential
17 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) pump
18 Multiplate clutch 'E'
19 Dog clutch 'F'
20 Input shaft
21 Torsional damper
22 Torque converter stator
23 Torque converter lock-up clutch
24 Torque converter turbine
25 Torque converter assembly
26 Torque converter impeller
The main casing retains the ATF (automatic transmission fluid) at the bottom. A drain plug is located in the main casing. The
oil level is checked by removal of a level plug, with the engine running and the transmission fluid at a temperature of between
37 to 45°C (99 to 113°F). The level is correct when the oil flow becomes a drip from the level plug hole.

The transmission has a fluid cooler which is located at the front of the transmission, adjacent to the fluid pan. The cooler is
connected to the transmission casing by two sealed connections. The fluid cooler is connected into the engine cooling system
and cools the transmission fluid by heat transfer through the cooler to the engine coolant.
For additional information, refer to: Transmission Cooling (307-02 Transmission/Transaxle Cooling, Description and
Operation).

TORQUE CONVERTER

Item Description

marvelstar-store
 A Torque Converter fitted to GTDi 2.0L and TD4 2.2L Engines
1 Turbine
2 Impeller
3 Stator
4 Transmission connection
5 One-way clutch
6 Lock-up clutch
7 Engine drive plate attachment studs
8 Torsional damper
9 Torque converter housing
B Torque Converter fitted to Ingenium I4 2.0L Diesel Engine
1 Turbine
2 Impeller
3 Stator
4 Transmission connection
5 One-way clutch
6 Lock-up clutch
7 Engine drive plate attachment bolts
8 Torsional damper - including pendulum masses
The torque converter is the coupling element between the engine and the transmission and is located in the torque converter
housing, on the engine side of the transmission. The driven power from the engine crankshaft is transmitted hydraulically and
mechanically through the torque converter to the transmission. The torque converter is connected to the engine by a drive
plate.

The torque converter comprises an impeller, a stator and a turbine. The torque converter is a sealed unit with all components
located between the converter housing cover and the impeller. The two components are welded together to form a sealed,
fluid filled housing. With the impeller welded to the converter housing cover, the impeller is therefore driven at engine
crankshaft speed.

The torque converter contains a hydraulically operated lock-up clutch which is controlled by the TCM via a solenoid in the
valve block. The solenoid actuates spool valves to control the hydraulic pressure applied to the clutch. This allows the TCM to
provide 3 modes of converter operation; unlocked, partially locked and fully locked.

VALVE BLOCK

The valve block is located in a vertical position at the front of the transmission main casing, behind a sealed cover. The valve
block contains a number of solenoids and spool valves to control the transmission operation. The solenoids are controlled by
the TCM to provide gear changes and smooth transition between ratio changes.

If the TCM or the valve block is replaced, a diagnostic routine using an approved Land Rover diagnostic system will be
required to calibrate the TCM .

Valve Block Assembly

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) pump intake
2 ATF pump pressure outlet
3 Sensor unit
4 System Pressure Control Valve (PCV)
5 Torque converter lock-up clutch PCV
6 Multiplate clutch 'B' PCV
7 Multiplate clutch 'E' PCV
8 Dog clutch A solenoid valve
9 Dog clutch F solenoid valve
10 Multiplate clutch 'D' PCV
11 Multiplate clutch 'C' PCV
12 Park lock solenoid valve
13 Magnetic valve control solenoid - park lock actuator
14 Electrical connector
15 Valve block
Valve Block Components

marvelstar-store
Item Description
1 System pressure spool valve
2 Torque converter pressure spool valve
3 Lubrication spool valve
4 Dog clutch 'A' spool valve
5 Dog clutch 'F' spool valve
6 Multiplate clutch 'D' spool valve

marvelstar-store
 7 Magnetic holding valve piston
8 Multiplate clutch 'C' spool valve
9 Park lock spool valve
10 Magnetic valve control solenoid - park lock actuator
11 Park lock solenoid valve
12 Multiplate clutch 'D' Pressure Control Valve (PCV)
13 Multiplate clutch 'C' PCV
14 Retainer
15 Dog clutch 'F' solenoid valve
16 Dog clutch 'A' solenoid valve
17 Multiplate clutch 'E' PCV
18 Multiplate clutch 'B' PCV
19 Torque converter lock-up clutch PCV
20 System PCV
21 Valve housing
22 Intermediate plate
23 Valve and spring
24 Valve and spring
25 Valve and spring
26 Ball rocker
27 Valve and spring
28 Multiplate clutch 'C' spool valve
29 Multiplate clutch 'D' spool valve
30 Pressure sensor
31 Torque converter lock-up clutch spool valve
32 Shift system pressure spool valve
33 Pressure reduction spool valve
34 Valve plate
Pressure Control valves

Six PCV's are located in the valve block. The solenoid operated PCV's are controlled by PWM (pulse width modulation) signals
from the TCM . The solenoids convert the electrical signals into hydraulic control pressure proportional to the signal to actuate
the spool valves and clutches for precise transmission operation.

Five PCV solenoids for the multiplate clutch and the torque converter lock-up clutch supply a higher control pressure as the
signal current increases and can be identified by an orange connector cap. The TCM operates the solenoids using PWM signals.
The TCM monitors engine load and clutch slip and varies the solenoid duty cycle accordingly. The solenoids have a 12 V
operating voltage and a pressure range of 0 - 4.7 bar (0 - 68 lbf.in²).

One PCV solenoid for the system pressure control supplies a lower control pressure as the signal amperage increases and can
be identified by a gray connector cap. The TCM monitors engine load and clutch slip and varies the solenoid duty cycle
accordingly. The solenoids have a 12 V operating voltage and a pressure range of 4.7 - 0 bar (68 - 0 lbf.in 2 ).

The resistance of the solenoid coil winding for all PCV solenoids is 5.05 Ohms at 20 °C (68 °F).

Solenoid Valves

marvelstar-store
Three solenoid valves are located in the valve block. The solenoid valves are controlled by the TCM and converts electrical
signals into hydraulic control signals to control dog clutch application.

The solenoid valve is an open/closed, on/off solenoid which is controlled by the TCM switching the solenoid to earth. The TCM
also supplies power to the solenoid. The TCM energises the solenoid in a programmed sequence for clutch application for gear
ratio changes and shift control.

The resistance of the solenoid coil winding for solenoid is between 10 to 11 Ohms at 20 °C (68 °F).

Park Lock Actuator - Magnetic Valve Control Solenoid

Item Description
A Solenoid in locked (energized) condition - park lock released
B Solenoid in unlocked (de-energized) condition - park lock engaged
1 Park lock spool valve
2 Control solenoid
3 Claw locked
4 Claw unlocked
A control solenoid is located in the valve block. The solenoid is controlled by the TCM and converts electrical signals into
hydraulic control signals to control the electronic park lock function.

The control solenoid is an on/off solenoid which is controlled by the TCM by switching the solenoid to earth.

marvelstar-store
When the Park lock is to be released, the park lock solenoid valve sends ATF pressure to the spool valve and moves it into
contact with the claws of the solenoid. Movement of the spool valve moves the park rod and releases the park pawl from the
park interlock gear. The control solenoid is energised by the TCM and the claws close to retain the spool valve in the unlocked
position. A shuttle valve retains ATF pressure on the spool to prevent inadvertent park lock operation in the event of an
electrical failure until the engine is stopped.

When the Park lock is to be engaged, ATF pressure is released from the spool valve and the TCM de-energises the control
solenoid. The claws are released, the spool valve returns under spring pressure to the park lock position and the park lock is
engaged. A Service Park Release (SPR) procedure must be performed to release the parking lock manually if an electrical
failure occurs or the engine is not running.

To allow the vehicle to roll through a car wash, the control solenoid remains energised if the engine is stopped with the TCS in
neutral. This holds the transmission out of park without hydraulic pressure for 10 minutes. After this time the control solenoid
is de-energised, releasing the claws and allowing the spool valve to return to the park position.

The resistance of the solenoid coil winding is 25 Ohms at 20 °C (68 °F).

Sensor Unit

Item Description
1 'PARK' (P) sensor
2 Pressure sensor connector
3 Speed sensor (torque converter turbine and output shaft)
4 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) temperature sensor
5 Connector pins for pressure control valves, solenoid valves and park lock control solenoid
6 Connector board
7 Transmission electrical connector
The sensor unit is mounted on the valve block and secured with three screws. The sensor unit comprises a 26 pin electrical
connector, a 'PARK' sensor, a pressure sensor connector, two speed sensors, ten solenoid connectors and an ATF temperature
sensor.

The electrical connector is fitted with seals through a hole in the transmission main casing and secured with a spring clip.

The 'PARK' (P) sensor is located inside the main casing, adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a boss in
the main casing with a screw. The 'PARK' sensor comprises a sliding switch which is operated by the selector shaft when it is
moved by the park lock actuator.

Two speed sensors are used in the transmission and are located within the transmission housing and are connected to the
sensor unit. The sensors take their speed reading from the slots in the clutch basket of the multiplate clutch E and the gear

marvelstar-store
teeth of the spur pinion. The sensors provide input and output speed signals to the TCM . Both speed signals are received by
the TCM which uses the signals to calculate engine torque output, shift timing and torque converter lock-up.

The fluid temperature sensor is integrated into the internal wiring harness within the transmission sensor unit. It detects the
ATF temperature in the transmission and transmits a signal corresponding to the temperature to the TCM . The TCM monitors
the temperature and adjusts clutch and brake application to provide smooth gear shifts across a wide range of temperatures
and ATF viscosities.

Each solenoid is connected by two pins integral with the connector board. Each solenoid pins is connected via a harness to the
electrical connector.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) PUMP

Item Description
1 ATF filter
2 Intermediate plate
3 Drive pinion
4 Stator shaft
5 Drive chain
6 ATF pump
The ATF pump is located in an intermediate plate within the transmission main casing. The intermediate plate is attached to
the inside of the transmission main casing with studs and nuts, behind the torque converter. The intermediate plate contains

marvelstar-store
the splined stator shaft, to which the torque converter stator is connected. The torque converter shell extends into and drives
a drive pinion with an integral sprocket, which operates a roller drive chain to drive the ATF pump. The drive pinion is
therefore rotated at engine speed.

The pump is located at the bottom of the transmission main casing and is attached to the housing with screws. An ATF filter
ensures that any particulate matter is collected by the filter before the ATF enters the ATF pump.

The ATF pump is a vane cell pump which can produce a pressure of between 3.5 and 44.0 bar (50 and 638 lbf/in²) and a flow
of 14.7 cm³ (0.9 in³). The pump can operate at speeds from 700 to 7800 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) with a maximum
speed of 8600 RPM.

DRIVE CLUTCHES

Multiplate Drive or Brake Clutch – Typical

marvelstar-store
Item Description
1 Cylinder
2 Piston
3 Disk spring
4 Metal plates
5 Friction plates
6 Baffle plate
7 Pressure equalization chamber

marvelstar-store
 8 Piston chamber
There are two multiplate drive clutches and two multiplate brakes used in the ZF 9HP48 automatic transmission. Each clutch
or brake comprises a number of friction plates dependent on the output controlled. A typical clutch or brake consists of a
number of steel outer plates and inner plates with friction material bonded to each face.

The drive clutches have both the friction plate and the metal plates rotating when the clutch is open. Multiplate brakes have
either the friction plate or the metal plate rotating, with one fixed stationary.

Clutch / Brake Operation

Multiplate clutch 'B' Connects the input shaft to sun gear 'S1'
Multiplate clutch 'E' Connects the input shaft to planet carrier 3 and ring gear 4
Multiplate brake 'C' Locks sun gear 'S1'
Multiplate brake 'D' Locks ring gear 2
The multiplate clutch and brake plates are held apart mechanically by a disk spring and hydraulically by ATF pressure. The
ATF pressure is derived from a lubrication channel which supplies ATF to the transmission components. The ATF is passed via
drillings in the input shaft into the chamber between the baffle plate and the piston. To prevent inadvertent clutch application
due to pressure build up produced by centrifugal force, the fluid in the pressure equalization chamber overcomes any pressure
in the piston chamber and holds the piston off the clutch plate assembly. The multiplate brakes do not require a baffle plate
and pressure equalization chamber to compensate for centrifugal pressure which occurs in a rotating piston.

When clutch application is required, pressure from the ATF pump is applied to the piston chamber from the supply port. This
pressure overcomes the low pressure fluid present in the pressure equalization chamber. The piston moves, against the
pressure applied by the disk spring, and compresses the clutch plate assembly. When the pressure falls, the disk spring
pushes the piston away from the clutch plate assembly, disengaging the clutch.

DOG CLUTCHES

Two dog clutches are used on the transmission; dog clutch 'A' connects the input shaft to sun gear S2 and ring gear R1, and
dog clutch 'F' connects sun gears S3 and S4 to the centering plate mounted in the transmission casing.

Both dog clutches are similar in their operation. Each clutch is operated by ATF pressure acting on a double acting piston to
move the dog clutch into and out of engagement.

Dog Clutch 'A'

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Planetary gear set 1
2 Sensing piston
3 Dog 'A'
4 ATF pressure supply for dog clutch 'A' release
5 Input shaft
6 Piston
7 Planet carrier
8 ATF pressure supply for dog clutch 'A' engagement
Dog clutch 'A' is located at the end of the input shaft and is controlled by a double acting piston located within the input shaft.

A double acting piston is located internally in the input shaft and can move within the shaft when ATF pressure is applied to
either side of the piston. The piston is connected to the dog 'A' by a pin which moves in a slot in the input shaft.

Dog 'A' is a sleeve with internal and external splines. Dog 'A' is permanently engaged with the input shaft via the internal
splines. When the piston moves dog 'A' along the input shaft to the 'closed' position, dog 'A' engages with splines on the
gearset 1 and 2 planet carrier, transferring drive from the input shaft to the gear set 2. When the dog 'A' is to be disengaged
to the 'open' position, ATF pressure is applied to the opposite side of the piston and dog 'A' is moved along the input shaft and
is disengaged from the planet carrier. Dog 'A' is in the 'closed' position in gears 1 through 7.

marvelstar-store
The dog 'A' has two states; open and closed. The piston cannot determine if the dog 'A' has travelled its full distance into or
out of engagement with the ring gear carrier or has remained in an intermediate position. The piston is fitted with a sensing
piston and the ATF pressure leakage through the sensing piston can be measured by the pressure sensor in the sensor unit.

The sensing piston is hollow and moves axially within the piston. Referring to the below illustration, if ATF pressure is applied
to the right side of the piston, the piston and the sensing piston are pushed to the left. During the movement of the piston, a
small amount of ATF pressure is passed through the sensing piston. This leakage pressure is measured at the left side of the
piston by the pressure sensor. When the piston has moved fully to the left and reached its end position, the leakage through
the sensing piston is blocked. The pressure drop on the left side of the piston is sensed and the TCM can determine the dog
clutch 'A' is fully disengaged with the ring gear carrier.

If the pressure on the left side of the piston does not drop within a specified shift time, the TCM can determine that the dog
'A' has stopped in an intermediate position.

The dog clutch 'A' has four possible states of operation as follows:

marvelstar-store
Item Description
A Dog 'A' open - piston at end position
B Dog 'A' closing - piston at intermediate position
C Dog 'A' closed - piston at end position
D Dog 'A' opening - piston at intermediate position
1 ATF Pressure applied - dog 'A' open
2 ATF pressure applied - dog 'A' closed
3 Leakage through sensing piston for pressure sensing.

marvelstar-store
A. Dog 'A' Open - ATF pressure is applied to the piston from the left side chamber and the dog clutch 'A' is open. The ATF
pressure in the right chamber is almost zero because the sensing piston is pushed to its limit of movement and leakage
through the sensing piston is prevented.

B. Dog 'A' Closing - ATF pressure is applied from the right side chamber which starts the piston moving to the left into
engagement with the ring gear carrier. The piston is now in the intermediate position and leakage pressure is passed through
the sensing piston into the left side chamber. Pressure in the left side chamber can be measured and will be approximately 2
bar (29 lbf in³).

C. Dog 'A' Closed - ATF pressure is applied to the piston from the right side chamber, the dog 'A' is closed and fully engaged
with the ring gear carrier. The ATF pressure in the left chamber is almost zero because the sensing piston is pushed to its limit
of movement and leakage through the sensing piston is prevented.

D. Dog 'A' Opening - ATF pressure is applied to the piston from the left side chamber which starts the piston moving to the
right and disengaging from the ring gear carrier. The piston is now in the intermediate position and leakage pressure is passed
through the sensing piston into the right side chamber. Pressure in the right side chamber can be measured and will be
approximately 2 bar (29 lbf in³).

Dog Clutch 'F'

Item Description
1 ATF pressure supply - open
2 Spur pinion
3 Angular contact ball bearing race

marvelstar-store
 4 ATF pressure supply - close
5 Pressure sensing leakage hole
6 Sun gear 3 and 4
7 Dog 'F'
8 Bearing support housing
Dog clutch 'F' is located between the multiplate clutch 'E' and planetary gear set 4. The dog clutch is controlled by a double
acting piston located within the bearing support housing.

Dog 'F' is a sleeve with internal and external splines. Dog 'F' is permanently engaged on the splines with the bearing support
housing, which in turn is fixed and static within the transmission casing. When dog 'F' is moved to the closed position, it acts
as a brake for sun gears 3 and 4 in planetary gear set 4.

The dog 'F' has two states; open and closed. Dog 'F' employs a more simple sensing system than dog 'A'. Dog 'F' is also the
piston itself and does not use a sensing piston. The piston of dog 'F' has a leakage sensing hole which is used to detect its
current position via pressure sensing.

Referring to the below illustration, if ATF pressure is applied to the right side of the piston, the piston is pushed to the left.
During the movement of the piston, a small amount of ATF pressure is passed through the leakage sensing hole. This leakage
pressure is measured at the left side of the piston by the pressure sensor in the sensor unit. When the piston has moved fully
to the left and reached its end position, the leakage through the leakage sensing hole is blocked. The pressure drop on the left
side of the piston is sensed and the TCM can determine that dog clutch 'F' is fully engaged with sun gears 3 and 4.

If the pressure on the left side of the piston does not drop within a specified shift time, the TCM can determine that the dog 'F'
has stopped in an intermediate position.

The dog clutch 'F' has four possible states of operation as follows:

marvelstar-store
Item Description
A Dog 'F' open - piston at end position
B Dog 'F' closing - piston at intermediate position
C Dog 'F' closed - piston at end position
D Dog 'F' opening - piston at intermediate position
1 ATF Pressure applied - dog 'F' open
2 ATF pressure applied - dog 'F' closed
3 ATF pressure applied - dog 'F' in intermediate position

marvelstar-store
 4 Leakage through leakage sensing hole for pressure sensing
A. Dog 'F' Open - ATF pressure is applied to the piston from the right side chamber and the dog clutch 'F' is open. The ATF
pressure in the left chamber is almost zero because the piston is pushed to its limit of movement and leakage through the
leakage sensing hole is prevented.

B. Dog 'F' Closing - ATF pressure is applied from the left side chamber which starts the piston moving to the right into
engagement with the sun gears 3 and 4. The piston is now in the intermediate position and leakage pressure is passed
through the leakage sensing hole into the right side chamber. Pressure in the right side chamber can be measured and will be
approximately 2 bar (29 lbf in³).

C. Dog 'F' Closed - ATF pressure is applied to the piston from the left side chamber, the dog 'F' is closed and fully engaged
with the sun gears 3 and 4. The ATF pressure in the right chamber is almost zero because the piston is pushed to its limit of
movement and leakage through the leakage sensing hole is prevented.

D. Dog 'F' Opening - ATF pressure is applied to the piston from the right side chamber which starts the piston moving to the
left and disengaging from the sun gears 3 and 4. The piston is now in the intermediate position and leakage pressure is
passed through the leakage sensing hole into the left side chamber. Pressure in the left side chamber can be measured and
will be approximately 2 bar (29 lbf in³).

One-Way Clutch - Torque Converter

Item Description
A Unlocked condition
B Locked condition
1 Roller
2 Cage
3 Spring
4 Inner race
The roller clutch uses parallel rollers, located between the smooth, cylindrical inner race and the inclined cam faces of the
clutch body. Springs are used to hold the rollers in position between the two contact faces.

When the clutch is rotated in a clockwise direction, the rollers become trapped between the inner race and the inclined cam
faces of the clutch body, providing positive (locked) rotation of the inner race, locking the clockwise rotation of the stator.
When the clutch is rotated in a clockwise direction, the rollers are moved away from the inclined cam faces and can rotate
freely (unlocked) with the clutch body, this allows the torque converter stator to rotate freely when the vehicle is decelerating.

PLANETARY GEAR TRAINS

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Gear set 1
2 Gearset 2
3 Gear set 3
4 Gear set 4
The planetary gear trains used on the 9HP48 transmission comprise four planetary gear sets; GS1, GS2, GS3 and GS4.

marvelstar-store
Engine torque is transferred, via operation of single or combinations of multiplate clutches, multiplate brakes and two dog
clutches, to the four planetary gear trains. The gear trains are controlled by reactionary inputs from the multiplate clutches to
produce the nine forward gears and one reverse gear. The gear ratios are as follows:

Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th Reverse
Ratio 4.713 2.842 1.909 1.382 1.00 0.808 0.699 0.580 0.480 3.830
Sun gear S2 of gear set GS2 has additional internal gearing and also operates as the ring gear R1 of gear set GS1.

Ring gear R3 is connected to planet carrier PC1 and PC2 and therefore rotates in the same direction and speed as the planet
carrier.

Gear sets GS3 and GS4 are connected via a joint sun gear S3/S4 as a Simpson planetary gear set.

Ring gear R4 is connected to planet carrier PC3 and therefore rotates in the same direction and speed as the planet carrier.

Final output from the transmission occurs via gear set GS4 via a spur gear to the differential.

POWER FLOW

Operation of the transmission is controlled by the TCM which electrically activates various solenoids to control clutches to
achieve the required transmission gear selection. The sequence of solenoid activation is based on programmed information in
the TCM memory and physical transmission operating conditions such as vehicle speed, throttle position, engine load and the
TCS position.

Item Description
1 Torque converter lock-up clutch
2 Torque converter
3 Torque converter one-way clutch
4 Multiplate cutch 'E'
5 Dog clutch 'F'
6 Planetary gears P4
7 Ring gear R4
8 Ring gear R3
9 Planetary gear P3
10 Sun gear S4
11 Sun gear S3

marvelstar-store
 12 Dog clutch 'A'
13 Sun gear S1
14 Planetary gear P1
15 Ring gear R1
16 Sun gear S2
17 Planetary gear P2
18 Ring gear R2
19 Multiplate brake 'D'
20 Multiplate brake 'C'
21 Multiplate clutch 'B'
Solenoid Operation

The following table shows the clutches that are closed to achieve the required gear ratios.

Multiplate Clutch 'C' Multiplate Clutch 'D' Multiplate Clutch Multiplate Clutch Dog Clutch Dog Clutch
Gear
(Brake) (Brake) 'B' 'E' 'F' 'A'
1 X X X
2 X X X
3 X X X
4 X X X
5 X X X
6 X X X
7 X X X
8 X X X
9 X X X
R X X X
X= Clutch closed

In neutral, all of the solenoids are de-energized and the clutches and brakes are all disengaged, with the exception of dog
clutch 'F' which is engaged when the transmission is in neutral. This allows rotation from the input shaft to rotate the
planetary gear sets without transferring any drive to the differential.

PARK LOCK

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Park lock lever - Connection with park lock actuator spool valve
2 Selector shaft Service Park Release (SPR) lever
3 Park rod
4 Spring
5 Park lock pawl
6 Spring
7 Differential spur gear
8 Park lock gear
9 Park lock lever - Connection with PARK (P) sensor
The park lock comprises a selector shaft, a park lock lever, a shift rod, a park lock pawl and a park lock gear.

The park lock is electronically and hydraulically actuated via a control solenoid and a spool valve, which are located in the
valve block. A slot in the spool valve engages with a connection with a lever on the selector shaft. A second connection on the
lever engages with the PARK (P) sensor which is part of the sensor unit. Refer to the 'Valve Block' and 'Sensor Unit' sections in
this section for details of the individual components.

When the control solenoid is actuated, the park lock spool moves, rotating the park lock lever. The rotary motion of the lever
is converted to linear movement of the shift rod which moves in the required direction to apply or release the park lock pawl
from the park lock gear.

marvelstar-store
Service Park Release (SPR)

The SPR is a mechanical procedure which requires removal of the air filter housing for access. The procedure is required when
there has been a loss of vehicle electrical power or a failure to the automatic transmission preventing release of the park lock.

The following procedure must be used to release the park lock before moving the vehicle. The vehicle must be held by either
the electric park brake or wheel chocks to prevent it unintentionally moving when the park lock is released.

Item Description
A SPR engaged
B SPR released
1 5mm locking pin
Apply SPR

Make sure that the ignition is off (power mode 4)

Remove the air filter assembly to get access to the SPR lever on the automatic transmission
Rotate the SPR lever in a counter clockwise direction until the slot in the SPR lever aligns with a corresponding hole in
the automatic transmission casing
Hold the SPR lever in this position and insert a suitable 5mm diameter locking pin (Allen key for example) through the
slot in the SPR lever and into the hole in the automatic transmission casing
The vehicle can now be moved.

Release SPR

Remove the 5mm diameter locking pin from the SPR lever
Make sure the SPR lever has moved fully clockwise and the park lock is engaged
Replace the air filter assembly.

TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM)

marvelstar-store
The TCM is located on the top of the automatic transmission casing and is connected on the high speed CAN powertrain
systems bus to send and receive information to and from other system modules.

The TCM outputs signals to operate the transmission solenoid valves to control the hydraulic operation of the transmission.

The ECM (engine control module) supplies the engine management data on the high speed CAN powertrain systems bus. The
TCM requires engine data to efficiently control the automatic transmission operation, using for example; crankshaft torque,
engine speed, accelerator pedal angle, engine temperature etc.

The TCM processes signals from the transmission speed and temperature sensors, ECM and other vehicle systems. From the
received signal inputs and pre-programmed data, the TCM calculates the correct gear, torque converter clutch setting and
optimum settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control.

The steering angle sensor and the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module also supply data to the TCM on the high speed CAN
powertrain systems bus. The TCM uses data from these systems to suspend gear changes when the vehicle is cornering
and/or the ABS module is controlling braking or traction control.

The transmission is controlled by a 'shift by wire' system. The TCS is connected to the TCM on the high speed CAN powertrain
systems bus. Driver selections made on the TCS are passed via CAN messages to the TCM .

If the TCM , the transmission or the valve block is replaced, a diagnostic routine using an approved Land Rover diagnostic
system will be required to calibrate the TCM to learn the Touchpoint Adaptions. Refer to 'Touchpoint Adaptions' and 'Clutch
Adaptions' later in this section.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

NOTE: The following illustration shows the display when the transmission is in CommandShift™ mode. PRNDS is
displayed during normal transmission operation.

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
2 Gear indicator (Dynamic mode)
3 Transmission indicator
The instrument cluster is connected to the TCM via the high speed CAN powertrain systems bus. Transmission status is
transmitted by the TCM and displayed to the driver in the instrument cluster.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) is located in the upper right side of the instrument cluster, within the tachometer.
Transmission related faults which may affect the vehicle emissions output will illuminate the MIL .

The MIL is illuminated by the ECM on receipt of a relevant fault message from the TCM on the high speed CAN powertrain
systems bus. The nature of the fault can be diagnosed using a Land Rover approved diagnostic system which reads fault
codes stored in the memory.

Transmission Status Display

The transmission status display is located in the central Thin Film Transistor (TFT) message display in the instrument cluster.
The display shows the selected P R N D S position and the current selected gear in normal transmission modes. In Drive 'D'
the current gear is not displayed unless the paddle switches are operated.

In Dynamic (Sport) mode, the selected transmission gear is displayed in a central position in the TFT display.

DRIVING MODES

A number of different driving modes are available. Some can be selected by the driver and some are automatically initiated by
the TCM to adapt to different driving conditions.

Normal
Sports
Manual 'CommandShift™'
Cooling
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
Cruise
Limp home
Coast
Fast off recognition
Uphill and Trailer
Downhill

marvelstar-store
 Wide Throttle
Terrain Response
Reverse lock-out
Kick-Down
Shift Adapt Under Braking
Corner Recognition
Road Gradient Recognition
Driver Type Recognition

Normal

Normal mode is automatically selected by the TCM when the ignition is switched on (ignition mode 6). In this mode all
automatic and adaptive modes are active. Normal mode uses gear shift and lock-up maps which provide the optimum of fuel
consumption, emissions and driveability, depending on the driving style.

If the transmission is operated in sport mode or 'CommandShift™' mode and the TCS is moved back to the drive 'D' position,
then normal mode operation is resumed.

Sports

Sports mode provides enhanced acceleration and responsiveness by the use of sports shift maps. This mode allows the
transmission to down shift more readily and hold gears for longer at higher engine speeds.

Manual 'CommandShift™'

Manual 'CommandShift' mode allows the transmission to operate as a semi-automatic transmission. The driver can change up
and down the nine forward gears with the freedom of a manual transmission provided the requested gear is within the allowed
engine and vehicle speed range.

Shift maps are provided to protect the engine at high speeds. The TCM will automatically change up to a higher gear ratio to
prevent engine overspeed and change down to a lower gear ratio to avoid engine laboring and stalling.

When kick-down is requested the TCM shifts down to the lowest available gear. When the vehicle is stationary, the driver can
select 1st or 2nd to start off.

Upshifts (+) are optimized for performance via the short shift function, resulting in firmer feeling shifts than in automatic
mode. Downshift requests (-) utilize a throttle 'blip' during the shift, resulting in an improved shift feel.

Temporary Manual Gear Selection

With the TCS in the 'D' position, manual mode can be directly accessed by the single action of operating one of the steering
wheel paddle switches. This allows immediate, but temporary use of the shift paddles when the TCS is in 'D'. If continued use
of manual mode is required, the TCS must be moved to the Sport 'S' position to enter permanent manual mode in the
currently selected gear.

If the TCS remains in the 'D' position, temporary manual mode will be held while the driver is accelerating, decelerating,
cornering or continuing to request shifts using the paddle switches. The transmission will revert back to automatic operation
after a short period of driving at a steady speed. Alternatively, the upshift (+) paddle can be held for approximately 2 seconds
to return to automatic mode in TCS position 'D'.

Permanent Manual Gear Selection

Select the 'S' position on the TCS , permanent manual mode is then accessed by the operation of the steering paddle
switches. The instrument cluster message center will show the currently selected gear. To exit from manual mode, pull and
hold the upshift (+) paddle switch for approximately 2 seconds to return to automatic operation in Sport (S) mode.
Alternatively, rotate the TCS to the 'D' position; the transmission will revert to 'D' automatic mode.

Manual Operation

Upshifts are performed using a brief operation of the upshift (+) paddle switch. Downshifts are performed using the downshift
(-) paddle switch. The message center will display the selected gear.

The transmission will inhibit upshifts and downshifts if the requested shift would result in an engine speed outside the engine's
operating range.

Commandshift™ - Additional Features

Kick-Down: - Operation of kick-down mode will override the currently selected gear. The lowest available gear will be selected
for maximum acceleration and will be highlighted in the message center. Subsequent manual shifts may then be selected as
usual.

Positive Torque: - Provides throttle 'blips' on downshifts, improving transmission shift quality and response.

Shift Assist: - The transmission will automatically upshift at the engine speed redline in CommandShift mode, as if operated
manually. The transmission will automatically downshift, when the engine speed falls below the range for the currently
selected gear. When the vehicle approaches, or comes to rest, second gear is automatically selected. Subsequent starts from
standstill will occur in second gear, unless accelerator pedal demand is high or a downshift is manually selected, in which case
first gear will be selected. In all cases the message center will show the currently selected gear.

marvelstar-store
During sustained braking, if a downshift is selected at a speed which would result in an engine speed outside the engine's
operating range, the downshift will be delayed until the vehicle speed has reduced sufficiently for the gear selection to be
made, without causing the engine speed to exceed its normal operating range.

Cooling

Cooling mode is activated when the TCM detects excessively high ATF or engine coolant temperatures. When this mode is
active, torque converter lock-up is activated earlier to minimize a further rise in ATF and/or engine coolant temperature and
assist ATF cooling.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

The HDC mode assists the ABS control module in controlling the downhill speed of the vehicle. When HDC is active, the TCM
selects the most appropriate gear for the descent to maximize engine braking.

Maximum engine braking is applied using a shift map which initiates later upshifts and early downshifts.

Cruise

When speed control is activated, the TCM receives a speed control active message on the high speed CAN powertrain systems
bus. The TCM activates a speed control map which minimizes up and down shifts.

Cruise mode is active when speed control is selected to 'on' and the transmission is in drive 'D', Sport 'S', HDC or a Terrain
Response Grass/gravel/snow program. Unique cruise maps override the current mode to provide a smooth driving feel and
mode reselection.

Limp Home

If a transmission fault is detected by the TCM , the TCM adopts a limp home strategy and a message 'TRANSMISSION FAULT
LIMITED GEARS AVAILABLE' is displayed in the message center. If the fault has an effect on engine emissions, the MIL in the
instrument cluster will also be illuminated.

In limp home mode, P, R and N functions operate normally (if the fault allows these selections) and the TCM locks the
transmission in an available gear to allow the driver to take the vehicle to a Land Rover dealer or approved repairer. Torque
converter lock-up is disabled and reverse-lock-out will not function.

If the vehicle is stopped and subsequently restarted in the limp home mode condition, the TCM operates normally until the
fault which caused the condition is detected again.

Coast

Coast mode provides earlier downshifts during coasting dependant on output shaft deceleration rate to improve driveability
and refinement by avoiding negative to positive driveline torque reversal transmissions during the downshifts.

Fast Off Recognition

Fast off recognition is activated when the TCM detects that the driver has released the accelerator pedal quickly. This is
detected by the TCM monitoring for a high level of negative pedal angle from ECM signals on the high speed CAN Powertrain
systems bus. If this condition is detected, the TCM holds the current gear ratio to allow the driver to complete the manoeuvre
without the need for a downshift. The mode can remain active for a predetermined length of time or if the driving style
remains passive.

Fast off recognition mode assists vehicle stability and is used in conjunction with a lateral acceleration input during cornering
to maintain the current gear until the corner is negotiated.

Uphill and Trailer

Uphill and trailer mode can be active when the transmission is operating in normal, sport or Terrain Response modes. When
the vehicle is pulling a trailer or driving up an incline, the TCM detects the increased resistance by monitoring engine torque
and speed signals received from the ECM on the high speed CAN powertrain systems bus and also transmission output shaft
speed sensor signals. Uphill and trailer mode will provide downshifts to prevent a drop in transmission torque output and
maintain driving force.

Downhill

Downhill mode can be active when the transmission is operating in normal, sport or Terrain Response modes. When the
vehicle is descending an incline, the TCM detects a reduction in resistance by monitoring engine torque and speed signals
received from the ECM on the high speed CAN powertrain systems bus and also transmission output shaft speed sensor
signals. Downhill mode assists engine braking by selecting an appropriate gear reducing the load required on the brakes.

Wide Throttle

Wide open throttle mode operates for part throttle upshifts and kick-down upshifts. It provides consistent wide open throttle
upshift performance under all driving conditions. The full engine speed range is used in all driving modes; normal, sport, hill
modes and CommandShift™. Compensation is used for delays (hydraulic and electronic) in gear change request to gear
change start to provide smooth changes and correct shift point correction.

Terrain Response

marvelstar-store
The Terrain Response system has a unique set of shift maps for each of the Terrain Response programs. These programs
override existing modes; for example when HDC is active and the 'Sand', 'Mud and Ruts' or 'Grass/Gravel/Snow' programs are
selected, a specific Terrain Response map is used, not the HDC mode shift map detailed previously.

Reverse Lock-Out

If the TCS is moved from N to R and the vehicle is travelling forwards, reverse selection is prevented if the vehicle speed is 5
km/h (3 mph) or more.

The same strategy is applied if the vehicle is moving backwards and D or S are selected on the TCS , the selection will be
prevented if the vehicle speed is 5 km/h (3 mph) or more.

Kick-Down

When D is selected and the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the transmission will down-shift to the lowest appropriate
gear. Once the accelerator pedal is returned to a normal driving position, the transmission will upshift to the highest
appropriate gear. Kick-down will vary according to road speed, current gear selection and accelerator pedal movement.

Shift Adapt Under Braking

Under braking, the transmission will vary the downshift point in proportion to braking effort and road gradient. This feature
works in conjunction with the positive torque function, resulting in a smoother down-shift. If Sport mode S is selected, driver
type recognition will vary the activation of this feature according to driving style.

Corner Recognition

Corner recognition inhibits up-shifts during cornering to provide improved vehicle balance. If Sport mode S is selected, driver
type recognition will vary the activation of this feature according to driving style.

Road Gradient recognition

When the vehicle is driven on an uphill gradient, the transmission adapts the shift pattern to make better use of the engine
power.

When the vehicle is driven on a long downhill gradient, the transmission may automatically select a lower gear to increase
engine braking. Selecting Sport mode S will increase the tendency of the transmission to select a lower gear in these
conditions, further increasing engine braking.

It is also possible to select a lower gear to increase engine braking using the gear shift - paddle switch.

Driver Type Recognition

In Sport mode S, the transmission monitors driving style and in combination with other vehicle systems, varies the shift
schedule, fast off, corner recognition and shift adapt under braking functions according to the driving style.

TRANSMISSION FAULT STATUS

If the TCM detects a fault with the transmission system, it will enter a default (limp home) mode to prevent further damage to
the transmission and allow the vehicle to be driven. If possible reverse gear will be available and also 3rd gear only.

When a fault is detected, a high speed CAN powertrain systems bus message is sent from the TCM and is received by the
instrument cluster. The instrument cluster illuminates the MIL (if required) and displays an applicable message in the message
center.
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).

Some transmission faults may not illuminate the MIL or display a fault message, but the driver may notice a reduction in shift
quality.

TOUCHPOINT ADAPTIONS

The transmission is supplied by ZF with Touchpoint Adaptions set in the Transmission Control Module (TCM) at the factory
which match the transmission to which the TCM is attached.

CAUTION: TOUCHPOINT ADAPTIONS MUST ONLY BE PERFORMED WHEN A NEW TCM OR A TCM FROM ANOTHER
VEHICLE HAS BEEN FITTED. UNDER NO OTHER CIRCUMSTANCES MUST TOUCHPOINT ADAPTIONS BE PERFORMED. Resetting
Touchpoint Adaptions for any reason other than replacing the TCM could result in poor shift performance if the procedure is
carried out unnecessarily.

Before performing a diagnostic Touchpoint Adaption reset procedure using an approved Land Rover diagnostic system, ensure
the following conditions are applied:

the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is at a temperature greater than 30 degrees C (86 degrees F)
the Transmission Control switch (TCS) is in the 'Park' position
the vehicle is stationary
the engine is running at idle speed
Brake pressure applied using the foot brake
the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is applied and held on manually to ensure it does not release when 'Drive' is selected
no faults or Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present in the TCM.

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: If the EPB is allowed to release, the Touchpoint Adaption reset procedure will be terminated.

When the transmission is built, it is tested at the ZF factory to determine how much electrical current is required by each
Pressure Control Valve (PCV) to attain a datum engagement point. The engagement (Touchpoint) is determine by a
predefined level of friction in the clutch plates.

This data is stored with the serial number of the transmission and the same data is written to the TCM fitted to that
transmission. This ensures that each transmission has a uniform performance.

If the Touchpoint Adaption data is not available because the TCM or the transmission has been replaced, the Touchpoint
Adaptions contained in the TCM will be incorrect for the transmission. This will result in harsh clutch engagements and could
cause damage to the transmission.

Using the Touchpoint Adaptions learning routine in the approved Land Rover diagnostic system, enables the TCM to establish
the Touchpoint for all the clutches. Once the Touchpoint Adaptions have been learnt, the Clutch Adaptions routine must be
performed to further refine the transmission operation.

CLUTCH ADAPTIONS

When the vehicle is driven, the TCM monitors and refines the clutch pressures and engagement points to maintain smooth
transition between gear changes.

After certain service operations, the Clutch Adaptions may need to be reset to restore optimum performance of the
transmission.

When the vehicle is driven, the TCM monitors the gear changes. When the TCM determines that smooth and reliable changes
are occurring, it initiates a Clutch Adaptions learning cycle. The learning cycle determines if higher or lower PCV pressures are
required or if PCV timing can be improved to apply smoother gear change transitions. The dynamic behaviour of each clutch is
monitored and can be compensated for. The TCM will also monitor static engagement when the vehicle is stationary.

The Clutch Adaptions are initially started after a reset with drive cycles including the ability to cruise at various speeds. The
fully Clutch Adaptions are achieved gradually over many drive cycles.

The Clutch Adaptions ensure that the transmission provides smooth gear changes without slip for the life of the transmission.
The Clutch Adaptions compensate for wear providing that the Touch Adaptions were correct for the static calibration of the
transmission.

The Clutch Adaption process compensates for assembly build tolerances in the hydraulic system, mechanical tolerances of the
transmission components to include friction and electrical tolerances for example resistance and inductance. All of these can
affect the dynamic behaviour of the transmission.

The Clutch Adaptions ensure that the TCM is operating at its optimum operating parameters adjusted to suit the individual
characteristics of the transmission. The TCM to a lesser extent, also adjusts to the characteristics of the driver and vehicle.

NOTE: Some drivers and their driving style may inhibit the Clutch Adaption process, which can lead to transmission
driveability issues over a period of time.

ENGINE SPEED AND TORQUE MONITORING

The ECM constantly supplies the TCM with information on engine speed and torque through messages on the CAN powertrain
systems bus. The TCM uses this information to calculate the correct and appropriate timing of shift changes.

If the messages are not received from the ECM , the TCM will implement a back-up strategy to protect the transmission from
damage and allow the vehicle to be driven.

In the event of an engine speed or torque signal failure, the transmission will adopt the electrical limp home mode with the
transmission operating in a fixed gear.

TOWING FOR RECOVERY

WARNING: Ensure that the remote handset remains in the vehicle whilst the vehicle is being recovered. Removing the
remote handset will engage the steering lock, which will prevent the vehicle from steering correctly.

If the engine cannot be run whilst the vehicle is being recovered, there will be no power assistance for the steering or brakes.
This will result in greater effort being required to steer or slow the vehicle.

CAUTION: The vehicle should not be towed more than required to load to a trailer or recovery vehicle.

NOTES:

The recommended recovery method is by trailer or recovery vehicle.

marvelstar-store
 Where recovery to a vehicle or trailer is not possible (for example vehicle is off-road), the vehicle can be towed with all
4 wheels on the ground for a distance of up to 10 km (6.2 miles) at a speed no greater than 25 Km/h (15 mph). The Service
Park Release (SPR) procedure must be used to disengage the park lock.

Secure the towing attachment from the recovery vehicle to the front towing eye.

Ensure the remote handset is in the vehicle and switch on the ignition (power mode 6) by pressing the start/stop button once.

NOTE: Leaving the ignition switched on for extended periods will cause the battery to drain.

The Service Park Release (SPR) procedure must be used to disengage the park lock.

Release the electric park brake.

Tow the vehicle onto the trailer or recovery vehicle.

Apply the electric park brake and manually disengage the SPR, remove the pin and ensure the park lock lever is in the correct
position to engage the park lock.

Switch off the ignition (power mode 4) and remove the remote handset from the vehicle.

CAUTION: The vehicle cannot be towed in a reverse direction.

SYSTEM OPERATION

Operation of the transmission is controlled by the TCM , which electrically activates various solenoids to control the
transmission gear selection. The sequence of solenoid activation is based on programmed information in the TCM memory and
physical transmission operating conditions such as vehicle speed, throttle position, engine load and rotary TCS position.

Engine torque is transferred, via operation of combinations of clutches to the planetary gear trains. The gear trains are
controlled by reactionary inputs from brakes and clutches to produce the 9 forward gears and 1 reverse gear.

The shift elements (clutches and brakes) are actuated hydraulically. Fluid pressure is applied to the required clutch and/or
brake, pressing the plates together and allowing drive to be transmitted through the plates. The purpose of the shift elements
is to perform power-on shifts with no interruption to traction and smooth transition between gear ratios.

CONTROL DIAGRAM

NOTE: A = Hardwired; AN = High speed CAN Powertrain systems

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
2 Central Junction Box (CJB)
3 Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
4 Engine Control module (ECM)
5 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module
6 Instrument cluster
7 Valve block
8 Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
9 Ground
10 Fuse - ignition supply from ignition relay
11 Ignition relay (CJB)
12 Fuse - Permanent battery supply

Published: 01-Oct-2013
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Level Check
General Procedures

marvelstar-store
 Check
WARNINGS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.

CAUTION: Vehicle must be horizontal during this operation.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

2. Connect the Land Rover equipment.

3. Start and run the engine.

4. Select terrain response mode. Grass/Gravel/Snow.

5.
WARNING: Make sure that all four wheels are off the ground
for this step.

NOTE: Move the transmission control switch (TCS) from D to S

then using the steering paddles pause in each gear for a minimum 10
seconds until you reach 4th gear. (max 2000rpm)

Using the diagnostic equipment monitor the transmission fluid

temperature until 35 degrees celsius is reached.

6.
CAUTION: Decelerate the wheels until they stop, then turn
the (TCS) back into the P position.

Make sure that torque converter is full of oil by raising the engine
speed to 2000rpm for 10 seconds, return to idle speed.

7.
CAUTION: Engine must be running to carry out the fluid level
check.

8. CAUTIONS:

Transmission fluid temperature must not exceed 45

degrees celsius.

Discard the sealing plug.

Drain the fluid into a suitable container.

NOTE: With the engine running a small amount of

automatic transmission fluid should drip out of the level
plug.

marvelstar-store
 When transmission fluid temperature reaches 37 degrees
celsius, remove the level plug and wait until oil stops
dripping out.

9.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

If the transmission fluid does not come out of the

transmission fluid level plug hole the transmission fluid
level is insufficient. If this is the case add the
transmission fluid in 0.5 litre units into the transmission
fluid fill plug hole until fluid comes out.

Torque: 35 Nm

10.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

NOTE: If the temperature has exceeded 45 degrees

celsius before the plug is re-fitted, you must start the
procedure again.

Torque: 35 Nm

11. Switch off the engine.

marvelstar-store
12. Remove the container.

13. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
Removal and Installation).

14. Lower the vehicle.

15. Disconnect the diagnostic tool.

marvelstar-store
Published: 05-Oct-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel
Installation

Special Tool(s)
303-021
Engine support bracket

JLR-303-1591
Lifting Bracket, Engine - Rear

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Some illustrations may show the transmission removed for clarity.

1.
NOTE: Remove the torque converter retainer.

2.
NOTE: This step is only required if a new
component is installed.

marvelstar-store
 3.
NOTE: This step is only required if previously
removed.

Torque: 10 Nm

4.
NOTE: This step is only required if previously
removed.

Torque: 10 Nm

5. NOTES:

marvelstar-store
 This step only applies to vehicles from the following markets;
China all MY, Taiwan all MY and Gulf 18MY onwards.

Make sure that the transmission anti-theft label is fitted evenly

and has no bubbles or folds. It must not be fitted over the curvature
of the transmission casing.

Before installing the transmission inspect the highlighted area,

If no transmission anti-theft label is fitted, proceed with the following
steps;

1. Make sure the VIN number on the label matches the VIN
number of the vehicle.
2. Using a suitable cleaning fluid throughly clean the highlighted
are of the transmission.
3. Install the transmission anti-theft label to the highlighted
area.

6. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the component is clean, free of

foreign material and lubricant.

Apply the correct specification and quantity of

grease.

Refer to: Specifications (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, Specifications).

marvelstar-store
7. WARNINGS:

This step requires the aid of another technician.

Make sure that the transmission is secured with suitable

retaining straps.

Make sure the torque converter remains with the transmission.

CAUTIONS:

Make sure the torque converter is fully located into the oil pump
drive.

Apply grease of the correct specification to the torque converter

spigot.

Make sure that the component is correctly located on the

locating dowels.

Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign
material.

8. Torque: 65 Nm

marvelstar-store
 9. Torque: 65 Nm

10. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that new bolts are installed.

Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.

Torque: 62 Nm

11. Torque: 65 Nm

marvelstar-store
 12. Torque: 65 Nm

13. Remove the transmission jack.

14.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluids.

Torque: 60 Nm

marvelstar-store
 15.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluids.

NOTE: :Remove and discard the blanking caps.

Torque: 12 Nm

16. Torque: 4 Nm

17. Torque: 60 Nm

marvelstar-store
 18. Torque: 24 Nm

19. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that new bolts are installed.

Make sure that the installation marks are aligned.

NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts working

diagonally.

Torque: 40 Nm

20. Refer to: Front Halfshaft RH - RHD AWD/LHD AWD (205-04 Front
Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).

21. Refer to: Front Halfshaft LH (205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts,

Removal and Installation).

22. Lower the vehicle.

23. Torque: 80 Nm

marvelstar-store
 24. Torque: 175 Nm

25. Torque:
M8 24 Nm
M12 80 Nm

marvelstar-store
26. Support the engine.

Remove the Special Tool(s): 303-021 , JLR-303-1591

27. Torque: 50 Nm

28. Repeat the above step for the other side.

marvelstar-store
 29.
Repeat the above step for the other side.

30.
CAUTION: To prevent water ingress and
subsequent transmission damage, make sure that the
breather is fully pushed home into the transmission
casing. The white line around the circumference of the
pipe should not be visible when correctly installed.

31.

marvelstar-store
 32.

33.
NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector is
correctly secured.

34.

marvelstar-store
 35.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
coolant.

36. Torque: 8 Nm

37.

marvelstar-store
 38. Torque: 10 Nm

39.

40. Torque: 12 Nm

marvelstar-store
 41.

42.

marvelstar-store
 43.

44. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06A Starting System - INGENIUM I4

2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

45. Refer to: Plenum Chamber (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).

46. Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

47. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
Removal and Installation).

48. Refer to: Engine Cover - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (501-05

Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).

49. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

50. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

51. Connect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

52. If a new component has been installed, configure using Land

Rover approved diagnostic equipment.

Published: 02-Oct-2015
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle -
Maintenance

CAUTION: Use only shell L12108 (ZF Lifeguard 8) Automatic transmission fluid. Use of any other fluids may result in a
transmission malfunction or failure.

Description Intervals

marvelstar-store
Normal maintenance Filled for life.
Severe duty maintenance Change the fluid at 48,000 km (30,000 miles) intervals.

Capacities
Litres
Transmission Fluid 6.5

Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives

Description Specification
9HP48 Transmission fluid Shell L12108 (ZF Lifeguard 8)
Metal surface cleaner WSW-M5B392-A
High temperature grease Molecote FB180
Connection sleeve grease IYX500050

Torque Specifications
Description Nm lb-ft lb-in
Main control valve body retaining bolts 8 - 71
Transmission control module 24 18 -
Torque converter retaining nuts 60 44 -
Transmission fluid cooler retaining bolts 10 - 88
Transmission fluid level plug 35 26 -
Transmission fluid drain plug 35 26 -
Transmission fluid fill plug 35 26 -
Transmission fluid pan retaining bolts 9 - 79
External oil feed pipe retaining bolts 10 - 88
Transmission end cover retaining bolts 10 - 88

Torque Specifications
Transmission Bolts Nm lb-ft lb-in
Diesel transmission retaining bolts 60 44 -
Petrol transmission retaining bolts 48 35 -

Published: 12-Aug-2016
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel - Charge Air Cooler
Removal and Installation

Removal

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining and Vacuum Filling

(303-03B Engine Cooling - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol - SULEV,
General Procedures).

3. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
- INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

4.

marvelstar-store
 5.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
coolant.

6.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
coolant.

7. Torque: 7 Nm

marvelstar-store
 8.

9.

10. Torque: 7 Nm

marvelstar-store
 11.
CAUTION: Remove and discard the O-ring
seals.

NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the

component is removed for access only.

Installation

1.
CAUTION: Install a new O-ring seals.

To install reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 30-Sep-2014
Battery, Mounting and Cables -
General Specification - Stop-start and timed climate models:
Item Specification
Battery:
Type H7 AGM (VRLA)
Capacity 80Ah/800CCA

General Specification - All except stop-start and timed climate models

Item Specification
Battery:
Type H7 Flooded
Capacity 80Ah/700CCA

marvelstar-store
Battery Disconnect/Connect

CAUTION: The vehicle status must be established before attempting battery disconnect/connect. Reference must be
then made to the following table to establish the relevant procedure to be followed.

NOTE: Make a note of the customers radio preset stations.

Vehicle status Procedure

Vehicle without Telematics 1
Vehicle with Telematics 2

Procedure 1
Disconnect battery Connect battery
1. Chock the wheels 1. Make sure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
2. Open the hood 2. Connect battery ground cable to the battery - 6Nm
3. Remove the battery cover 3. Connect the BMS electrical connector
4. Disconnect the engine wiring harness 4. Connect the battery ground to starter motor connector/terminal (if equipped) -
ground connector/terminal 10Nm
5. Disconnect the battery ground to
starter motor connector/terminal (if 5. Connect the engine wiring harness ground connector/terminal - 6Nm
equipped)
6. Disconnect the battery monitoring
system (BMS) module electrical 6. Install the battery cover
connector
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable
7. Close the hood
from the battery
8. Switch the ignition on
9. Reset radio station preset stations
10. Reset the clock
11. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power window up to hard stop, release
switch, reapply and hold for 1 second (relay in door will click). One touch should now
work

Procedure 2
Disconnect battery Connect battery
1. Make sure the customer has placed
stolen vehicle tracking into Service Mode 1. Make sure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
(if equipped)
2. Chock the wheels 2. Connect battery ground cable to the battery - 6Nm
3. Open the hood 3. Connect the BMS electrical connector
4. Connect the battery ground to starter motor connector/terminal (if equipped) -
4. Remove the battery cover
10Nm
5. Disconnect the engine wiring harness
5. Connect the engine wiring harness ground connector/terminal - 6Nm
ground connector/terminal
6. Disconnect the battery ground to starter
6. Install the battery cover
motor connector/terminal (if equipped)
7. Disconnect the battery monitoring
7. Close the hood
system (BMS) module electrical connector
8. Disconnect the battery ground cable
8. Switch the ignition on
from the battery
9. Reset radio station preset stations
10. Reset the clock
11. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power window up to hard stop,
release switch, reapply and hold for 1 second (relay in door will click). One touch
should now work
12. Request stolen vehicle tracking removed from Service Mode (if equipped)

Torque Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Vehicle body brace retaining bolts 25 18 -
Battery terminal nuts 6 - 53
Battery ground terminal nut - battery to starter motor retaining stud (if equipped) 10 7 -
Battery tray retaining bolts 10 7 -

Published: 14-Jun-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
General Procedures

Draining
WARNINGS:

marvelstar-store
 Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.

CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the area around the component is clean and free of foreign material.

Vehicle must be horizontal during this operation.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
- INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

2.
NOTE: Discard the sealing plug.

3. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

4.
CAUTION: The ambient temperature should not
be below 20 degrees celsius.

NOTES:

Drain the fluid into a suitable container.

Discard the sealing plug.

Allow the fluid to drain until the flow stops.

marvelstar-store
 5.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

Torque: 35 Nm

6. Lower the Vehicle.

7. CAUTIONS:

Install a new sealing plug.

Use transmission fluid meeting Landrover

specification.

Fill the transmission with 3.5 litres of oil.

Refer to: Specifications (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, Specifications).
Torque: 35 Nm

8. Carry out transmission fluid level check.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

Published: 30-Jun-2015
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Engine Cover INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1.

marvelstar-store
 2.

Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure

Published: 18-Oct-2016
Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Halfshaft LH
Removal and Installation

Special Tool(s)
205-857
Remover, Halfshaft

marvelstar-store
 307-520
Installer, Output Shaft Seal

JLR-307-686
Installer, Oil Seal

Removal

CAUTIONS:

Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle on the suspension.

Do not allow halfshafts to hang unsupported at one end or joint damage will occur.

Make sure the halfshaft constant velocity (CV) joints do not over articulate. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the CV joints.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).

3.
CAUTION: Discard the nut.

marvelstar-store
 4.

5. CAUTIONS:

Do not use air tools to remove the nut.

Discard the nut.

marvelstar-store
 6.
CAUTION: Discard the bolt.

NOTE: Right hand illustration shown, left hand is

similar.

7.
NOTE: Right hand illustration shown, left hand
is similar.

marvelstar-store
 8.
NOTE: Right hand illustration shown, left hand
is similar.

9. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the driveshaft is supported with

suitable retaining straps.

Do not use a hammer to detach the halfshaft from

the hub assembly, failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the halfshaft.

Special Tool(s): 205-857

10.
WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluids.

CAUTION: Keep the halfshaft horizontal to avoid

damaging the oil seal.

marvelstar-store
 11.
CAUTION: Discard the snap ring.

12.
CAUTION: Inspect the seal, replace if
damaged

NOTE: Automatic transmission shown, manual

transmission is similar.

Installation

1. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free
of corrosion and foreign material.

marvelstar-store
 Make sure the seal is installed correctly.

NOTE: This step is only required if previously

removed.

Special Tool(s): 307-520 , JLR-307-686

2. NOTES:

Do not fully engage the halfshaft until the oil seal

protector has been removed.

Manual transmission shown, automatic

transmission is similar.

To prevent oil seal damage use the protector when

installing the shaft into the transmission. It is not a
special tool but is available from the Parts Catalogue.

3. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the snap ring is installed from the

end of the halfshaft. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the vehicle.

Install a new snap ring.

marvelstar-store
 4. CAUTIONS:

Pull on the halfshaft inboard joint to make sure the

clip has fully engaged and retains the halfshaft inboard
joint within the transmission.

Keep the halfshaft horizontal to avoid damaging

the oil seal.

NOTES:

Do not fully engage the halfshaft until the oil seal

protector has been removed.

Manual transmission shown, automatic

transmission is similar.

5.

6.
NOTE: Right hand illustration shown, left hand
is similar.

marvelstar-store
 7.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is
installed.

NOTE: Right hand illustration shown, left hand is

similar.

Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:180°

8.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is
installed.

NOTE: Right hand illustration shown, left hand is

similar.

Torque:
Stage 1:90 Nm
Stage 2:120°

marvelstar-store
 9.
WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is
installed.

CAUTIONS:

Do not use air tools to install the nut. Failure to

follow this instruction may result in damage to the
component.

Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.

Tighten the nut without the weight of the vehicle

on the suspension.

Torque:
Stage 1:100 Nm
Stage 2:90°

10. Torque: 10 Nm

marvelstar-store
 11.
WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is
installed.

Torque: 65 Nm

12. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).

13. Manual transmission vehicles only: Check and top-up

the transmission fluid level.

14. Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by Land

Rover, check and adjust the wheel alignment.

Refer to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00 Suspension System - General

Information, General Procedures).

Published: 01-Oct-2013
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Level Check
General Procedures

Check
WARNINGS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

marvelstar-store
Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.

CAUTION: Vehicle must be horizontal during this operation.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

2. Connect the Land Rover equipment.

3. Start and run the engine.

4. Select terrain response mode. Grass/Gravel/Snow.

5.
WARNING: Make sure that all four wheels are off the ground
for this step.

NOTE: Move the transmission control switch (TCS) from D to S

then using the steering paddles pause in each gear for a minimum 10
seconds until you reach 4th gear. (max 2000rpm)

Using the diagnostic equipment monitor the transmission fluid

temperature until 35 degrees celsius is reached.

6.
CAUTION: Decelerate the wheels until they stop, then turn
the (TCS) back into the P position.

Make sure that torque converter is full of oil by raising the engine
speed to 2000rpm for 10 seconds, return to idle speed.

7.
CAUTION: Engine must be running to carry out the fluid level
check.

8. CAUTIONS:

Transmission fluid temperature must not exceed 45

degrees celsius.

Discard the sealing plug.

Drain the fluid into a suitable container.

NOTE: With the engine running a small amount of

automatic transmission fluid should drip out of the level
plug.

When transmission fluid temperature reaches 37 degrees

celsius, remove the level plug and wait until oil stops
dripping out.

marvelstar-store
 9.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

If the transmission fluid does not come out of the

transmission fluid level plug hole the transmission fluid
level is insufficient. If this is the case add the
transmission fluid in 0.5 litre units into the transmission
fluid fill plug hole until fluid comes out.

Torque: 35 Nm

10.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

NOTE: If the temperature has exceeded 45 degrees

celsius before the plug is re-fitted, you must start the
procedure again.

Torque: 35 Nm

11. Switch off the engine.

12. Remove the container.

13. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
Removal and Installation).

14. Lower the vehicle.

15. Disconnect the diagnostic tool.

Published: 15-Oct-2014
Climate Control - Plenum Chamber
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTES:

marvelstar-store
Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.

All vehicles

1. Refer to: Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16, Removal and Installation).

2. Repeat the above procedure for the other wiper arm.

3.

4.

marvelstar-store
 5. Torque: 25 Nm

6. Torque: 25 Nm

7.

8.

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Repeat the step for the other side.

9.
NOTE: Repeat the step for the other side.

Vehicles without heated washers

10.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluids.

marvelstar-store
Vehicles with heated washers

11.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluids.

All vehicles

12.

13.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is
removed for access only.

marvelstar-store
Vehicles without heated washers

14.

Vehicles with heated washers

15.

marvelstar-store
 All vehicles

16.
NOTE: Repeat the step for the other side.

Installation

marvelstar-store
 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 01-Oct-2013
Front End Body Panels - Engine Undershield
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2.
NOTE: Loosen the bolt, but do not fully remove.

Torque: 10 Nm

3. Torque: 10 Nm

marvelstar-store
 4.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the
component is removed for access only.

Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 30-Jun-2015
Starting System - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel - Starter Motor
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

All vehicles

1.

marvelstar-store
 WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

3. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

4. Torque: 10 Nm

Vehicles with automatic transmission

5.

marvelstar-store
Vehicles with manual transmission

6. Torque: 7 Nm

All vehicles

7.

marvelstar-store
 8. Torque: 48 Nm

Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 18-Oct-2016
Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Halfshaft RH RHD AWD/LHD AWD
Removal and Installation

Special Tool(s)
205-857
Remover, Halfshaft

205-872
Installer, Transfer Case Seal

marvelstar-store
Removal

CAUTIONS:

Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle on the suspension.

Do not allow halfshafts to hang unsupported at one end or joint damage will occur.

Make sure the halfshaft constant velocity (CV) joints do not over articulate. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the CV joints.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).

3.
CAUTION: Discard the nut.

4.

marvelstar-store
 5.
WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is
installed.

CAUTION: Discard the nut.

6.
CAUTION: Discard the bolt.

marvelstar-store
 7.

8.

9. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the driveshaft is supported with

suitable retaining straps.

Do not use a hammer to detach the halfshaft from

the hub assembly, failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the halfshaft.

Special Tool(s): 205-857

marvelstar-store
 10.

11.
WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluids.

CAUTION: Keep the halfshaft horizontal to avoid

damaging the oil seal.

marvelstar-store
 12. CAUTIONS:

Inspect the seal, replace if damaged

Take extra care not to damage the mating faces.

Installation

1. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free
of corrosion and foreign material.

Make sure the seal is installed correctly.

NOTE: This step is only required if previously

removed.

Special Tool(s): 205-872

2.
CAUTION: Keep the halfshaft horizontal to avoid
damaging the oil seal.

3.
CAUTION: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.

marvelstar-store
 4. Torque: 25 Nm

5.

marvelstar-store
 6.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is
installed.

Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:180°

7.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is
installed.

Torque:
Stage 1:90 Nm
Stage 2:120°

marvelstar-store
 8.
WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is
installed.

CAUTIONS:

Do not use air tools to install the nut. Failure to

follow this instruction may result in damage to the
component.

Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.

Torque:
Stage 1:100 Nm
Stage 2:90°

9. Torque: 10 Nm

marvelstar-store
 10.
WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is
installed.

Torque: 65 Nm

11. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).

12.
CAUTION: The fluid filler plug is not a fluid
level plug.

Check and top-up the transfer case fluid level.

13. Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by Land

Rover, check and adjust the wheel alignment.

Refer to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00 Suspension System - General

Information, General Procedures).

marvelstar-store
Published: 01-Feb-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Main Control Valve Body Solenoids
Removal and Installation

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign material.

Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling these components.

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

3. Remove the main control valve body.

Refer to: Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol
- SULEV (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and
Installation).

4.

marvelstar-store
 5. Torque: 6 Nm

6.

7. Torque: 6 Nm

marvelstar-store
 8.
NOTE: Note the position of the components
prior to removal.

Installation

1. To install reverse the removal procedure.

2. Using the approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment, run the

Automatic transmission valve block application.

Published: 30-Sep-2014
Battery, Mounting and Cables -
General Specification - Stop-start and timed climate models:
Item Specification
Battery:
Type H7 AGM (VRLA)
Capacity 80Ah/800CCA

General Specification - All except stop-start and timed climate models

Item Specification
Battery:
Type H7 Flooded
Capacity 80Ah/700CCA

Battery Disconnect/Connect

CAUTION: The vehicle status must be established before attempting battery disconnect/connect. Reference must be
then made to the following table to establish the relevant procedure to be followed.

NOTE: Make a note of the customers radio preset stations.

Vehicle status Procedure

Vehicle without Telematics 1
Vehicle with Telematics 2

Procedure 1
Disconnect battery Connect battery
1. Chock the wheels 1. Make sure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
2. Open the hood 2. Connect battery ground cable to the battery - 6Nm
3. Remove the battery cover 3. Connect the BMS electrical connector
4. Disconnect the engine wiring harness 4. Connect the battery ground to starter motor connector/terminal (if equipped) -
ground connector/terminal 10Nm
5. Disconnect the battery ground to
starter motor connector/terminal (if 5. Connect the engine wiring harness ground connector/terminal - 6Nm
equipped)
6. Disconnect the battery monitoring

marvelstar-store
system (BMS) module electrical 6. Install the battery cover
connector
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable
7. Close the hood
from the battery
8. Switch the ignition on
9. Reset radio station preset stations
10. Reset the clock
11. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power window up to hard stop, release
switch, reapply and hold for 1 second (relay in door will click). One touch should now
work

Procedure 2
Disconnect battery Connect battery
1. Make sure the customer has placed
stolen vehicle tracking into Service Mode 1. Make sure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
(if equipped)
2. Chock the wheels 2. Connect battery ground cable to the battery - 6Nm
3. Open the hood 3. Connect the BMS electrical connector
4. Connect the battery ground to starter motor connector/terminal (if equipped) -
4. Remove the battery cover
10Nm
5. Disconnect the engine wiring harness
5. Connect the engine wiring harness ground connector/terminal - 6Nm
ground connector/terminal
6. Disconnect the battery ground to starter
6. Install the battery cover
motor connector/terminal (if equipped)
7. Disconnect the battery monitoring
7. Close the hood
system (BMS) module electrical connector
8. Disconnect the battery ground cable
8. Switch the ignition on
from the battery
9. Reset radio station preset stations
10. Reset the clock
11. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power window up to hard stop,
release switch, reapply and hold for 1 second (relay in door will click). One touch
should now work
12. Request stolen vehicle tracking removed from Service Mode (if equipped)

Torque Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Vehicle body brace retaining bolts 25 18 -
Battery terminal nuts 6 - 53
Battery ground terminal nut - battery to starter motor retaining stud (if equipped) 10 7 -
Battery tray retaining bolts 10 7 -

Published: 31-May-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Main Control Valve Body GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi
2.0L Petrol - SULEV
Removal and Installation

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

CAUTION: Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling this component.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

marvelstar-store
3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L
Petrol - SULEV (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal
and Installation).

4.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component.

Remove and discard the bolts.

5.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

6.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

marvelstar-store
 7.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

8.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

9.

marvelstar-store
 10. CAUTIONS:

Take extra care not to damage the wiring

harnesses.

Care must be taken to avoid damage to the mating

surfaces.

NOTE: Note the orientation of the component prior

to removal.

11.
NOTE: Discard the components.

Installation

marvelstar-store
 1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the valve body as illustrated.

2.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the transmission as

illustrated.

3. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the electrical connector is installed

in the correct orientation as noted in the removal step.

Care must be taken not to damage the component.

marvelstar-store
 4.

5. Torque: 6 Nm

6.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is
installed to the noted removal position.

Torque: 6 Nm

7.

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Make sure that the wiring harness is
installed as illustrated, failure to follow this instruction
may cause damage to the wiring harness

8.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

9.
CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are
installed.

NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts in the sequence

illustrated.

Torque: 8 Nm

10.

marvelstar-store
 Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
SULEV (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and
Installation).

11. Connect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

12. Using the approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment, run the
Automatic transmission valve block application.

Published: 31-May-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Main Control Valve Body INGENIUM I4 2.0L
Diesel
Removal and Installation

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

CAUTION: Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling this component.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel

(307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).

4.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component.

Remove and discard the bolts.

marvelstar-store
 5.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

6.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

7.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

marvelstar-store
 8.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

9.

10. CAUTIONS:

Take extra care not to damage the wiring

harnesses.

Care must be taken to avoid damage to the mating

surfaces.

NOTE: Note the orientation of the component prior

to removal.

marvelstar-store
 11.
NOTE: Discard the components.

Installation

1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the valve body as illustrated.

2.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the transmission as

illustrated.

marvelstar-store
 3. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the electrical connector is installed

in the correct orientation as noted in the removal step.

Care must be taken not to damage the component.

4.

5. Torque: 6 Nm

marvelstar-store
 6.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is
installed to the noted removal position.

Torque: 6 Nm

7.
NOTE: Make sure that the wiring harness is
installed as illustrated, failure to follow this instruction
may cause damage to the wiring harness

8.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

9.

marvelstar-store
 CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are
installed.

NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts in the sequence

illustrated.

Torque: 8 Nm

10. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel

(307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).

11. Connect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

12. Using the approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment, run the
Automatic transmission valve block application.

marvelstar-store
Published: 31-May-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Main Control Valve Body INGENIUM I4 2.0L
Diesel
Removal and Installation

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

CAUTION: Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling this component.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel

(307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).

4.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component.

Remove and discard the bolts.

5.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

marvelstar-store
 6.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

7.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

8.

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

9.

10. CAUTIONS:

Take extra care not to damage the wiring

harnesses.

Care must be taken to avoid damage to the mating

surfaces.

NOTE: Note the orientation of the component prior

to removal.

11.

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Discard the components.

Installation

1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the valve body as illustrated.

2.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the transmission as

illustrated.

marvelstar-store
 3. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the electrical connector is installed

in the correct orientation as noted in the removal step.

Care must be taken not to damage the component.

4.

5. Torque: 6 Nm

marvelstar-store
 6.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is
installed to the noted removal position.

Torque: 6 Nm

7.
NOTE: Make sure that the wiring harness is
installed as illustrated, failure to follow this instruction
may cause damage to the wiring harness

8.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

9.

marvelstar-store
 CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are
installed.

NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts in the sequence

illustrated.

Torque: 8 Nm

10. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel

(307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).

11. Connect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

12. Using the approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment, run the
Automatic transmission valve block application.

Published: 30-Sep-2014
Battery, Mounting and Cables -
General Specification - Stop-start and timed climate models:
Item Specification
Battery:
Type H7 AGM (VRLA)
Capacity 80Ah/800CCA

General Specification - All except stop-start and timed climate models

Item Specification
Battery:
Type H7 Flooded
Capacity 80Ah/700CCA

Battery Disconnect/Connect

CAUTION: The vehicle status must be established before attempting battery disconnect/connect. Reference must be
then made to the following table to establish the relevant procedure to be followed.

NOTE: Make a note of the customers radio preset stations.

Vehicle status Procedure

Vehicle without Telematics 1
Vehicle with Telematics 2

Procedure 1
Disconnect battery Connect battery
1. Chock the wheels 1. Make sure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
2. Open the hood 2. Connect battery ground cable to the battery - 6Nm
3. Remove the battery cover 3. Connect the BMS electrical connector
4. Disconnect the engine wiring harness 4. Connect the battery ground to starter motor connector/terminal (if equipped) -
ground connector/terminal 10Nm

marvelstar-store
5. Disconnect the battery ground to
starter motor connector/terminal (if 5. Connect the engine wiring harness ground connector/terminal - 6Nm
equipped)
6. Disconnect the battery monitoring
system (BMS) module electrical 6. Install the battery cover
connector
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable
7. Close the hood
from the battery
8. Switch the ignition on
9. Reset radio station preset stations
10. Reset the clock
11. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power window up to hard stop, release
switch, reapply and hold for 1 second (relay in door will click). One touch should now
work

Procedure 2
Disconnect battery Connect battery
1. Make sure the customer has placed
stolen vehicle tracking into Service Mode 1. Make sure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
(if equipped)
2. Chock the wheels 2. Connect battery ground cable to the battery - 6Nm
3. Open the hood 3. Connect the BMS electrical connector
4. Connect the battery ground to starter motor connector/terminal (if equipped) -
4. Remove the battery cover
10Nm
5. Disconnect the engine wiring harness
5. Connect the engine wiring harness ground connector/terminal - 6Nm
ground connector/terminal
6. Disconnect the battery ground to starter
6. Install the battery cover
motor connector/terminal (if equipped)
7. Disconnect the battery monitoring
7. Close the hood
system (BMS) module electrical connector
8. Disconnect the battery ground cable
8. Switch the ignition on
from the battery
9. Reset radio station preset stations
10. Reset the clock
11. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power window up to hard stop,
release switch, reapply and hold for 1 second (relay in door will click). One touch
should now work
12. Request stolen vehicle tracking removed from Service Mode (if equipped)

Torque Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Vehicle body brace retaining bolts 25 18 -
Battery terminal nuts 6 - 53
Battery ground terminal nut - battery to starter motor retaining stud (if equipped) 10 7 -
Battery tray retaining bolts 10 7 -

Published: 25-Jan-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Pan INGENIUM I4 2.0L
Diesel
Removal and Installation

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to catch escaping fluid.

CAUTION: Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling this component.

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Some illustrations may show the transmission removed for clarity.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

marvelstar-store
Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

3. Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

4. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining and Vacuum Filling

(303-03A Engine Cooling - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, General
Procedures).

5. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

6.

7.

8.

marvelstar-store
 9.
CAUTION: Care must be taken when handling
the component. Do not place on a surface with the seal
faced down. Failure to follow this instruction may damage
the component.

Installation

1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are
clean and free of foreign material.

Tighten the bolts in the sequence illustrated.

Torque: 9 Nm

marvelstar-store
 2.
NOTE: This step is only required if previously
removed.

Torque: 10 Nm

3. Torque: 8 Nm

4.

marvelstar-store
5. Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

6. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

7. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining and Vacuum Filling

(303-03A Engine Cooling - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, General
Procedures).

8. Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

marvelstar-store
Published: 25-Jan-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Selector Shaft Seal INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel
Removal and Installation

Special Tool(s)
JLR-307-684
Installer, Oil Seal

Removal

NOTES:

Some illustrations may show the transmission removed for clarity.

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
- INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

2.

3.
CAUTION: Care must be taken when removing
the seal to prevent damage to the components.

Using a suitable tool, remove and discard the oil seal.

marvelstar-store
Installation

1. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free
of foreign material.

Make sure that the seal is correctly located.

Make sure a new oil seal is installed.

Special Tool(s): JLR-307-684

2. Torque: 10 Nm

marvelstar-store
 3. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
- INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

Published: 17-Nov-2015
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel - Air Cleaner
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1. Torque: 3.5 Nm

2. Torque: 8 Nm

marvelstar-store
 3. Torque: 2 Nm

4. Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for access

only.

5.
CAUTION: Inspect the O-ring seal, install a new
component if damaged.

Torque: 1.9 Nm

marvelstar-store
 6.

7.

marvelstar-store
 8.

Installation

marvelstar-store
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

marvelstar-store
Published: 25-Jan-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Torque Converter Seal INGENIUM I4 2.0L
Diesel
Removal and Installation

Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer

100-012-01
Slide Hammer Adapter

307-520
Installer, Output Shaft Seal

308-375
Remover, Input and Output Seal

JLR-307-683
Installer, Oil Seal

Removal

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Refer to: Torque Converter - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).

marvelstar-store
 3. CAUTIONS:

Care must be taken when removing the seal. Failure to follow

this instruction may cause damage to the components.

Make sure that extreme cleanliness is observed with the

following steps.

Make sure that the tools and equipment are clean, free of
foreign material and lubricant.

Special Tool(s): 100-012 , 100-012-01 , 308-375

Installation

1. CAUTIONS:

Make sure a new oil seal is installed.

Make sure that the tools and equipment are clean,

free of foreign material and lubricant.

Make sure that all the component mating faces are

clean.

Special Tool(s): 307-520 , JLR-307-683

marvelstar-store
 2. Refer to: Torque Converter - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).

3. Carry out a transmission fluid level check.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

Published: 25-Jan-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Torque Converter INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel
Removal and Installation

Special Tool(s)
JLR-307-688
Remover, Torque Converter

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Refer to: Transmission - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal).

3. Special Tool(s): JLR-307-688

marvelstar-store
Installation

1.
CAUTION: Make sure that all the component
mating faces are clean.

Special Tool(s): JLR-307-688

2.
CAUTION: Make sure the torque converter is
fully located into the oil pump drive.

marvelstar-store
 3. Refer to: Transmission - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Installation).

4. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

Published: 01-Oct-2013
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Level Check
General Procedures

Check
WARNINGS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.

CAUTION: Vehicle must be horizontal during this operation.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

2. Connect the Land Rover equipment.

3. Start and run the engine.

4. Select terrain response mode. Grass/Gravel/Snow.

5.
WARNING: Make sure that all four wheels are off the ground
for this step.

NOTE: Move the transmission control switch (TCS) from D to S

then using the steering paddles pause in each gear for a minimum 10
seconds until you reach 4th gear. (max 2000rpm)

Using the diagnostic equipment monitor the transmission fluid

temperature until 35 degrees celsius is reached.

6.
CAUTION: Decelerate the wheels until they stop, then turn
the (TCS) back into the P position.

Make sure that torque converter is full of oil by raising the engine
speed to 2000rpm for 10 seconds, return to idle speed.

7.
CAUTION: Engine must be running to carry out the fluid level
check.

8. CAUTIONS:

marvelstar-store
 Transmission fluid temperature must not exceed 45
degrees celsius.

Discard the sealing plug.

Drain the fluid into a suitable container.

NOTE: With the engine running a small amount of

automatic transmission fluid should drip out of the level
plug.

When transmission fluid temperature reaches 37 degrees

celsius, remove the level plug and wait until oil stops
dripping out.

9.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

If the transmission fluid does not come out of the

transmission fluid level plug hole the transmission fluid
level is insufficient. If this is the case add the
transmission fluid in 0.5 litre units into the transmission
fluid fill plug hole until fluid comes out.

Torque: 35 Nm

10.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

NOTE: If the temperature has exceeded 45 degrees

celsius before the plug is re-fitted, you must start the
procedure again.

Torque: 35 Nm

11. Switch off the engine.

marvelstar-store
12. Remove the container.

13. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
Removal and Installation).

14. Lower the vehicle.

15. Disconnect the diagnostic tool.

marvelstar-store
Published: 25-Jan-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Torque Converter INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel
Removal and Installation

Special Tool(s)
JLR-307-688
Remover, Torque Converter

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Refer to: Transmission - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal).

3. Special Tool(s): JLR-307-688

Installation

1.
CAUTION: Make sure that all the component
mating faces are clean.

Special Tool(s): JLR-307-688

marvelstar-store
 2.
CAUTION: Make sure the torque converter is
fully located into the oil pump drive.

3. Refer to: Transmission - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Installation).

4. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

Published: 05-Oct-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel
Removal

Special Tool(s)
303-021
Engine support bracket

marvelstar-store
 JLR-303-1591
Lifting Bracket, Engine - Rear

General Equipment
Transmission jack
NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Some illustrations may show the transmission removed for clarity.

1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

2. Refer to: Engine Cover - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (501-05 Interior

Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).

3. Refer to: Plenum Chamber (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and

Installation).

4. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

5. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06A Starting System - INGENIUM I4

2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

6. Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

7.

marvelstar-store
 8.

9.

10.

marvelstar-store
11.

12.

13.

14.

marvelstar-store
 15.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
coolant.

16.

17.

marvelstar-store
 18.

19.

20.

marvelstar-store
 21.
Repeat the above step for the other side.
Secure the hood at the highest position.

22. Repeat the above step for the other side.

23.

marvelstar-store
24. Support the engine.

Install the Special Tool(s): 303-021 , JLR-303-1591

Torque: 50 Nm

25.

marvelstar-store
 26.

27.

marvelstar-store
28.
NOTE: This step is only necessary when installing a new
component.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

29. Refer to: Front Subframe (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and

Mounting System, Removal and Installation).

30.
CAUTION: Discard the nut.

Refer to: Front Halfshaft LH (205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal

and Installation).

31. Refer to: Front Halfshaft RH - RHD AWD/LHD AWD (205-04 Front
Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).

32. CAUTIONS:

To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do not allow

the driveshaft to hang.

Make sure that the driveshaft is supported with

suitable retaining straps.

Discard the bolts.

Mark the components to aid installation.

33. CAUTIONS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new

blanking caps.

34.

marvelstar-store
 35.

36.

37.

marvelstar-store
 WARNING: This step requires the aid of
another technician.

CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

38.
WARNING: Make sure that the transmission is secured with
suitable retaining straps.

Using a suitable hydraulic jack, support the transmission.

General Equipment: Transmission jack

39.

40.

marvelstar-store
 41.

42.
CAUTION: Discard the bolts

43.

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Using a suitable transmission jack
support the differential case.

44.
WARNING: This step requires the aid of
another technician.

CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the dowels are still located on the

engine and not the transmission.

On removal and installation of the transmission,

make sure that the transmission does not damage the
brake pipe.

Make sure that the torque converter remains in the

transmission.

45.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the
component is removed for access only.

46.

marvelstar-store
 47.

Published: 01-Oct-2013
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Level Check
General Procedures

Check
WARNINGS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.

CAUTION: Vehicle must be horizontal during this operation.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

marvelstar-store
2. Connect the Land Rover equipment.

3. Start and run the engine.

4. Select terrain response mode. Grass/Gravel/Snow.

5.
WARNING: Make sure that all four wheels are off the ground
for this step.

NOTE: Move the transmission control switch (TCS) from D to S

then using the steering paddles pause in each gear for a minimum 10
seconds until you reach 4th gear. (max 2000rpm)

Using the diagnostic equipment monitor the transmission fluid

temperature until 35 degrees celsius is reached.

6.
CAUTION: Decelerate the wheels until they stop, then turn
the (TCS) back into the P position.

Make sure that torque converter is full of oil by raising the engine
speed to 2000rpm for 10 seconds, return to idle speed.

7.
CAUTION: Engine must be running to carry out the fluid level
check.

8. CAUTIONS:

Transmission fluid temperature must not exceed 45

degrees celsius.

Discard the sealing plug.

Drain the fluid into a suitable container.

NOTE: With the engine running a small amount of

automatic transmission fluid should drip out of the level
plug.

When transmission fluid temperature reaches 37 degrees

celsius, remove the level plug and wait until oil stops
dripping out.

9.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

If the transmission fluid does not come out of the

transmission fluid level plug hole the transmission fluid
level is insufficient. If this is the case add the
transmission fluid in 0.5 litre units into the transmission
fluid fill plug hole until fluid comes out.

Torque: 35 Nm

marvelstar-store
 10.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

NOTE: If the temperature has exceeded 45 degrees

celsius before the plug is re-fitted, you must start the
procedure again.

Torque: 35 Nm

11. Switch off the engine.

12. Remove the container.

13. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
Removal and Installation).

14. Lower the vehicle.

15. Disconnect the diagnostic tool.

Published: 05-Oct-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel
Installation

Special Tool(s)
303-021

marvelstar-store
 Engine support bracket

JLR-303-1591
Lifting Bracket, Engine - Rear

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Some illustrations may show the transmission removed for clarity.

1.
NOTE: Remove the torque converter retainer.

2.
NOTE: This step is only required if a new
component is installed.

marvelstar-store
 3.
NOTE: This step is only required if previously
removed.

Torque: 10 Nm

4.
NOTE: This step is only required if previously
removed.

Torque: 10 Nm

5. NOTES:

marvelstar-store
 This step only applies to vehicles from the following markets;
China all MY, Taiwan all MY and Gulf 18MY onwards.

Make sure that the transmission anti-theft label is fitted evenly

and has no bubbles or folds. It must not be fitted over the curvature
of the transmission casing.

Before installing the transmission inspect the highlighted area,

If no transmission anti-theft label is fitted, proceed with the following
steps;

1. Make sure the VIN number on the label matches the VIN
number of the vehicle.
2. Using a suitable cleaning fluid throughly clean the highlighted
are of the transmission.
3. Install the transmission anti-theft label to the highlighted
area.

6. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the component is clean, free of

foreign material and lubricant.

Apply the correct specification and quantity of

grease.

Refer to: Specifications (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, Specifications).

marvelstar-store
7. WARNINGS:

This step requires the aid of another technician.

Make sure that the transmission is secured with suitable

retaining straps.

Make sure the torque converter remains with the transmission.

CAUTIONS:

Make sure the torque converter is fully located into the oil pump
drive.

Apply grease of the correct specification to the torque converter

spigot.

Make sure that the component is correctly located on the

locating dowels.

Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign
material.

8. Torque: 65 Nm

marvelstar-store
 9. Torque: 65 Nm

10. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that new bolts are installed.

Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.

Torque: 62 Nm

11. Torque: 65 Nm

marvelstar-store
 12. Torque: 65 Nm

13. Remove the transmission jack.

14.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluids.

Torque: 60 Nm

marvelstar-store
 15.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluids.

NOTE: :Remove and discard the blanking caps.

Torque: 12 Nm

16. Torque: 4 Nm

17. Torque: 60 Nm

marvelstar-store
 18. Torque: 24 Nm

19. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that new bolts are installed.

Make sure that the installation marks are aligned.

NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts working

diagonally.

Torque: 40 Nm

20. Refer to: Front Halfshaft RH - RHD AWD/LHD AWD (205-04 Front
Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).

21. Refer to: Front Halfshaft LH (205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts,

Removal and Installation).

22. Lower the vehicle.

23. Torque: 80 Nm

marvelstar-store
 24. Torque: 175 Nm

25. Torque:
M8 24 Nm
M12 80 Nm

marvelstar-store
26. Support the engine.

Remove the Special Tool(s): 303-021 , JLR-303-1591

27. Torque: 50 Nm

28. Repeat the above step for the other side.

marvelstar-store
 29.
Repeat the above step for the other side.

30.
CAUTION: To prevent water ingress and
subsequent transmission damage, make sure that the
breather is fully pushed home into the transmission
casing. The white line around the circumference of the
pipe should not be visible when correctly installed.

31.

marvelstar-store
 32.

33.
NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector is
correctly secured.

34.

marvelstar-store
 35.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
coolant.

36. Torque: 8 Nm

37.

marvelstar-store
 38. Torque: 10 Nm

39.

40. Torque: 12 Nm

marvelstar-store
 41.

42.

marvelstar-store
 43.

44. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06A Starting System - INGENIUM I4

2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

45. Refer to: Plenum Chamber (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).

46. Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

47. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
Removal and Installation).

48. Refer to: Engine Cover - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (501-05

Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).

49. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

50. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

51. Connect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

52. If a new component has been installed, configure using Land

Rover approved diagnostic equipment.

marvelstar-store
Published: 25-Jan-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Control Module (TCM) INGENIUM
I4 2.0L Diesel
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1. Refer to: Battery Tray (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Removal and Installation).

2. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
- INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

3.

4.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harness clips.

marvelstar-store
 5.
CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are
installed.

Torque: 24 Nm

Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

2.
NOTE: This step is only required if a new component is
installed.

Using the approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment, configure new

transmission control module (TCM) without transmission replacement.

Published: 17-Nov-2015
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel - Air Cleaner
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1. Torque: 3.5 Nm

marvelstar-store
2. Torque: 8 Nm

3. Torque: 2 Nm

marvelstar-store
4. Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for access
only.

5.
CAUTION: Inspect the O-ring seal, install a new
component if damaged.

Torque: 1.9 Nm

6.

marvelstar-store
7.

8.

marvelstar-store
Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 30-Sep-2014
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery Tray
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTES:

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. Refer to: Battery (414-01, Removal and Installation).

2.

marvelstar-store
 3. Torque: 10 Nm

4.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the
component is removed for access only.

Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

marvelstar-store
Published: 02-Jun-2014
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Cover
Removal and Installation

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.

CAUTION: Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling this component.

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

Transmission shown removed for clarity.

1. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04, Removal and Installation).

2.

3.

marvelstar-store
 4.

5.

marvelstar-store
 6.
CAUTION: Discard the bolts.

7.
CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are
clean and free of corrosion and foreign material.

NOTE: Discard the gasket.

Installation

marvelstar-store
1.
CAUTION: Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.

NOTE: Make sure that new bolts are installed.

Torque: 10 Nm

2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

marvelstar-store
Published: 25-Jan-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Pan INGENIUM I4 2.0L
Diesel
Removal and Installation

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to catch escaping fluid.

CAUTION: Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling this component.

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Some illustrations may show the transmission removed for clarity.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

3. Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

4. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining and Vacuum Filling

(303-03A Engine Cooling - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, General
Procedures).

5. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

6.

marvelstar-store
 7.

8.

9.
CAUTION: Care must be taken when handling
the component. Do not place on a surface with the seal
faced down. Failure to follow this instruction may damage
the component.

Installation

marvelstar-store
 1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are
clean and free of foreign material.

Tighten the bolts in the sequence illustrated.

Torque: 9 Nm

2.
NOTE: This step is only required if previously
removed.

Torque: 10 Nm

3. Torque: 8 Nm

marvelstar-store
 4.

5. Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

6. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

7. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining and Vacuum Filling

(303-03A Engine Cooling - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, General
Procedures).

8. Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

Published: 29-Jul-2015
Engine Cooling - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel - Cooling System Partial Draining and
Vacuum Filling
General Procedures

Special Tool(s)
HU-919
Coolant System Vacuum Refill Kit

JLR-303-1634
Adaptor, Cooling System Vacuum Refill Kit

Draining

marvelstar-store
 WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do not remove the filler cap
from the coolant expansion tank while the system is hot.

CAUTIONS:

The engine cooling system must be maintained with the correct concentration and type of anti-freeze solution to
prevent corrosion and frost damage. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the engine.

Engine coolant will damage the paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately remove the coolant and clean the area with
water.

1.
WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only
by a jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2.
WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could
be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do not remove
the filler cap from the coolant expansion tank while the
system is hot.

3. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

4. Position a container to collect the fluid.

5. NOTES:

Some components shown removed for clarity.

Collect the coolant in a clean container and reuse.

Attach a hose to the radiator drain tap.

Open the radiator drain tap.
Drain the coolant from the radiator.

marvelstar-store
 6. Close the radiator drain tap and remove the hose.

Filling

WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, do not remove the filler cap
from the coolant expansion tank while the system is hot.

CAUTIONS:

The engine cooling system must be maintained with the correct concentration and type of anti-freeze solution to
prevent corrosion and frost damage. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the engine.

Engine coolant will damage the paint finished surfaces. If spilt, immediately remove the coolant and clean the area with
water.

1. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

2. Prepare a sufficient amount of coolant to the specified

concentration.

3.
NOTES:

Make sure the coolant supply valve is in the closed

position on the special tool.

The special tool needs an air pressure of 6 to 8 bar (87 to

116 psi) to operate correctly.

Small diameter or long airlines may restrict airflow to the

coolant vacuum fill tool.

Special Tool(s): HU-919 , JLR-303-1634

1. Position the hose from the special tool into a container of
clean coolant.
2. Connect a regulated compressed air supply to the special
tool.
3. Move the special tool to the expansion tank.

marvelstar-store
4. NOTES:

Make sure the coolant supply valve is in the closed position on

the special tool.

The coolant vacuum fill tool needs an air pressure of 6 to 8 bar

(87 to 116 psi) to operate correctly.

Small diameter or long airlines may restrict airflow to the

coolant vacuum fill tool.

Open the air supply valve until -0.8 (-12 psi) Bar is shown on the
gauge.

Special Tool(s): HU-919 , JLR-303-1634

marvelstar-store
5.
Special Tool(s): HU-919 , JLR-303-1634
Close the air supply valve.
Allow 1 minute to check the vacuum is held.

marvelstar-store
6. NOTES:

The coolant is to be reused.

Close the coolant supply valve when the coolant expansion tank
MAX mark is reached or coolant movement has stopped.

Open the coolant supply valve and allow the coolant to be drawn into
the system.

Special Tool(s): HU-919 , JLR-303-1634

7. Remove the special tool.

8. Connect exhaust extraction hoses to the tail pipes.

9. Start and run the engine.

10. Install the coolant expansion tank cap.

11. Hold the engine speed at 2000 revolutions per minute (RPM) until
warm air is expelled from the heater.

12. Switch the engine off and allow to cool.

13. Clean any spilt or excess coolant from the vehicle.

14.

marvelstar-store
 WARNING: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by
escaping steam or coolant, allow the vehicle cooling system to cool
prior to carrying out this procedure.

Check and top-up the coolant if required.

Published: 12-Aug-2016
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel - Charge Air Cooler
Removal and Installation

Removal

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining and Vacuum Filling

(303-03B Engine Cooling - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol - SULEV,
General Procedures).

3. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
- INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

4.

5.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
coolant.

marvelstar-store
 6.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
coolant.

7. Torque: 7 Nm

8.

marvelstar-store
 9.

10. Torque: 7 Nm

11.

marvelstar-store
 CAUTION: Remove and discard the O-ring
seals.

NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the

component is removed for access only.

Installation

1.
CAUTION: Install a new O-ring seals.

To install reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 14-Jun-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
General Procedures

Draining
WARNINGS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.

CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the area around the component is clean and free of foreign material.

Vehicle must be horizontal during this operation.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
- INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

2.
NOTE: Discard the sealing plug.

marvelstar-store
3. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
Removal and Installation).

4.
CAUTION: The ambient temperature should not
be below 20 degrees celsius.

NOTES:

Drain the fluid into a suitable container.

Discard the sealing plug.

Allow the fluid to drain until the flow stops.

5.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

Torque: 35 Nm

marvelstar-store
 6. Lower the Vehicle.

7. CAUTIONS:

Install a new sealing plug.

Use transmission fluid meeting Landrover

specification.

Fill the transmission with 3.5 litres of oil.

Refer to: Specifications (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, Specifications).
Torque: 35 Nm

8. Carry out transmission fluid level check.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

Published: 30-Sep-2014
Battery, Mounting and Cables -
General Specification - Stop-start and timed climate models:
Item Specification
Battery:
Type H7 AGM (VRLA)
Capacity 80Ah/800CCA

General Specification - All except stop-start and timed climate models

Item Specification
Battery:
Type H7 Flooded
Capacity 80Ah/700CCA

marvelstar-store
Battery Disconnect/Connect

CAUTION: The vehicle status must be established before attempting battery disconnect/connect. Reference must be
then made to the following table to establish the relevant procedure to be followed.

NOTE: Make a note of the customers radio preset stations.

Vehicle status Procedure

Vehicle without Telematics 1
Vehicle with Telematics 2

Procedure 1
Disconnect battery Connect battery
1. Chock the wheels 1. Make sure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
2. Open the hood 2. Connect battery ground cable to the battery - 6Nm
3. Remove the battery cover 3. Connect the BMS electrical connector
4. Disconnect the engine wiring harness 4. Connect the battery ground to starter motor connector/terminal (if equipped) -
ground connector/terminal 10Nm
5. Disconnect the battery ground to
starter motor connector/terminal (if 5. Connect the engine wiring harness ground connector/terminal - 6Nm
equipped)
6. Disconnect the battery monitoring
system (BMS) module electrical 6. Install the battery cover
connector
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable
7. Close the hood
from the battery
8. Switch the ignition on
9. Reset radio station preset stations
10. Reset the clock
11. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power window up to hard stop, release
switch, reapply and hold for 1 second (relay in door will click). One touch should now
work

Procedure 2
Disconnect battery Connect battery
1. Make sure the customer has placed
stolen vehicle tracking into Service Mode 1. Make sure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
(if equipped)
2. Chock the wheels 2. Connect battery ground cable to the battery - 6Nm
3. Open the hood 3. Connect the BMS electrical connector
4. Connect the battery ground to starter motor connector/terminal (if equipped) -
4. Remove the battery cover
10Nm
5. Disconnect the engine wiring harness
5. Connect the engine wiring harness ground connector/terminal - 6Nm
ground connector/terminal
6. Disconnect the battery ground to starter
6. Install the battery cover
motor connector/terminal (if equipped)
7. Disconnect the battery monitoring
7. Close the hood
system (BMS) module electrical connector
8. Disconnect the battery ground cable
8. Switch the ignition on
from the battery
9. Reset radio station preset stations
10. Reset the clock
11. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power window up to hard stop,
release switch, reapply and hold for 1 second (relay in door will click). One touch
should now work
12. Request stolen vehicle tracking removed from Service Mode (if equipped)

Torque Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Vehicle body brace retaining bolts 25 18 -
Battery terminal nuts 6 - 53
Battery ground terminal nut - battery to starter motor retaining stud (if equipped) 10 7 -
Battery tray retaining bolts 10 7 -

marvelstar-store
Published: 02-Jan-2014
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Oil Supply Pipe
Removal and Installation

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04, Removal and Installation).

2.

3.

marvelstar-store
 4.

5.

marvelstar-store
 6.
CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are
clean and free of foreign material.

Torque: 10 Nm

Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

2. Carry out a transmission fluid level check.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01, General

Procedures).

marvelstar-store
Published: 01-Feb-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Pressure Sensor
Removal and Installation

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

CAUTIONS:

Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling this component.

Make sure that the area around the component is clean and free of foreign material.

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1. Remove the main control valve body.

Refer to: Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol
- SULEV (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and
Installation).

2.

3. Torque: 12 Nm

marvelstar-store
Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 31-May-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Main Control Valve Body GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi
2.0L Petrol - SULEV
Removal and Installation

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

CAUTION: Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling this component.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L

Petrol - SULEV (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal
and Installation).

4.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component.

Remove and discard the bolts.

marvelstar-store
 5.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

6.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

7.

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

8.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

9.

10. CAUTIONS:

marvelstar-store
 Take extra care not to damage the wiring
harnesses.

Care must be taken to avoid damage to the mating

surfaces.

NOTE: Note the orientation of the component prior

to removal.

11.
NOTE: Discard the components.

Installation

1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the valve body as illustrated.

marvelstar-store
 2.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the transmission as

illustrated.

3. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the electrical connector is installed

in the correct orientation as noted in the removal step.

Care must be taken not to damage the component.

4.

marvelstar-store
 5. Torque: 6 Nm

6.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is
installed to the noted removal position.

Torque: 6 Nm

7.
NOTE: Make sure that the wiring harness is
installed as illustrated, failure to follow this instruction
may cause damage to the wiring harness

8.

marvelstar-store
 CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

9.
CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are
installed.

NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts in the sequence

illustrated.

Torque: 8 Nm

10. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L
Petrol - SULEV (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal
and Installation).

11. Connect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

12. Using the approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment, run the
Automatic transmission valve block application.

Published: 31-May-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Main Control Valve Body INGENIUM I4 2.0L
Diesel
Removal and Installation

Removal

marvelstar-store
WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

CAUTION: Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling this component.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel

(307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).

4.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component.

Remove and discard the bolts.

5.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

marvelstar-store
 6.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

7.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

8.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

marvelstar-store
 9.

10. CAUTIONS:

Take extra care not to damage the wiring

harnesses.

Care must be taken to avoid damage to the mating

surfaces.

NOTE: Note the orientation of the component prior

to removal.

11.
NOTE: Discard the components.

Installation

marvelstar-store
 1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the valve body as illustrated.

2.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the transmission as

illustrated.

3. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the electrical connector is installed

in the correct orientation as noted in the removal step.

Care must be taken not to damage the component.

marvelstar-store
 4.

5. Torque: 6 Nm

6.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is
installed to the noted removal position.

Torque: 6 Nm

marvelstar-store
 7.
NOTE: Make sure that the wiring harness is
installed as illustrated, failure to follow this instruction
may cause damage to the wiring harness

8.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

9.
CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are
installed.

NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts in the sequence

illustrated.

Torque: 8 Nm

10.

marvelstar-store
Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).

11. Connect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

12. Using the approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment, run the
Automatic transmission valve block application.

marvelstar-store
Published: 01-Feb-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Sensor Unit
Removal and Installation

Removal

CAUTIONS:

Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling this component.

Make sure that the area around the component is clean and free of foreign material.

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1. Remove the main control valve body.

Refer to: Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol
- SULEV (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and
Installation).

2.

3. Torque: 6 Nm

marvelstar-store
 4.
NOTE: Note the fitted position of the sensor unit
connectors, prior to removal.

Installation

1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harness is correctly
routed.

To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 31-May-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Main Control Valve Body GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi
2.0L Petrol - SULEV
Removal and Installation

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

CAUTION: Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling this component.

marvelstar-store
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L

Petrol - SULEV (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal
and Installation).

4.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component.

Remove and discard the bolts.

5.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

6.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

marvelstar-store
 7.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

8.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

9.

marvelstar-store
 10. CAUTIONS:

Take extra care not to damage the wiring

harnesses.

Care must be taken to avoid damage to the mating

surfaces.

NOTE: Note the orientation of the component prior

to removal.

11.
NOTE: Discard the components.

Installation

marvelstar-store
 1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the valve body as illustrated.

2.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the transmission as

illustrated.

3. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the electrical connector is installed

in the correct orientation as noted in the removal step.

Care must be taken not to damage the component.

marvelstar-store
 4.

5. Torque: 6 Nm

6.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is
installed to the noted removal position.

Torque: 6 Nm

7.

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Make sure that the wiring harness is
installed as illustrated, failure to follow this instruction
may cause damage to the wiring harness

8.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

9.
CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are
installed.

NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts in the sequence

illustrated.

Torque: 8 Nm

10.

marvelstar-store
 Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
SULEV (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and
Installation).

11. Connect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

12. Using the approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment, run the
Automatic transmission valve block application.

Published: 31-May-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Main Control Valve Body INGENIUM I4 2.0L
Diesel
Removal and Installation

Removal

WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

CAUTION: Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when handling this component.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel

(307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).

4.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component.

Remove and discard the bolts.

marvelstar-store
 5.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

6.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

7.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

marvelstar-store
 8.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the component
prior to removal.

9.

10. CAUTIONS:

Take extra care not to damage the wiring

harnesses.

Care must be taken to avoid damage to the mating

surfaces.

NOTE: Note the orientation of the component prior

to removal.

marvelstar-store
 11.
NOTE: Discard the components.

Installation

1.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the valve body as illustrated.

2.
CAUTION: Make sure that the oil tubes are
correctly installed.

Install the new oil tubes to the transmission as

illustrated.

marvelstar-store
 3. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the electrical connector is installed

in the correct orientation as noted in the removal step.

Care must be taken not to damage the component.

4.

5. Torque: 6 Nm

marvelstar-store
 6.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is
installed to the noted removal position.

Torque: 6 Nm

7.
NOTE: Make sure that the wiring harness is
installed as illustrated, failure to follow this instruction
may cause damage to the wiring harness

8.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
wiring harnesses.

9.

marvelstar-store
 CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are
installed.

NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts in the sequence

illustrated.

Torque: 8 Nm

10. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel

(307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Removal and Installation).

11. Connect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

12. Using the approved Land Rover diagnostic equipment, run the
Automatic transmission valve block application.

marvelstar-store
Published: 05-Oct-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel
Removal

Special Tool(s)
303-021
Engine support bracket

JLR-303-1591
Lifting Bracket, Engine - Rear

General Equipment
Transmission jack
NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Some illustrations may show the transmission removed for clarity.

1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

2. Refer to: Engine Cover - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (501-05 Interior

Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).

3. Refer to: Plenum Chamber (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and

Installation).

4. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

5. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06A Starting System - INGENIUM I4

2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

6. Refer to: Charge Air Cooler (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and
Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

7.

marvelstar-store
 8.

9.

marvelstar-store
 10.

11.

12.

13.

marvelstar-store
 14.

15.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
coolant.

16.

marvelstar-store
 17.

18.

19.

marvelstar-store
 20.

21.
Repeat the above step for the other side.
Secure the hood at the highest position.

22. Repeat the above step for the other side.

marvelstar-store
 23.

24. Support the engine.

Install the Special Tool(s): 303-021 , JLR-303-1591

Torque: 50 Nm

marvelstar-store
 25.

26.

marvelstar-store
 27.

28.
NOTE: This step is only necessary when installing a new
component.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

29. Refer to: Front Subframe (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and

Mounting System, Removal and Installation).

30.
CAUTION: Discard the nut.

Refer to: Front Halfshaft LH (205-04 Front Drive Halfshafts, Removal

and Installation).

31. Refer to: Front Halfshaft RH - RHD AWD/LHD AWD (205-04 Front
Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).

32. CAUTIONS:

marvelstar-store
 To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do not allow
the driveshaft to hang.

Make sure that the driveshaft is supported with

suitable retaining straps.

Discard the bolts.

Mark the components to aid installation.

33. CAUTIONS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new

blanking caps.

34.

35.

marvelstar-store
 36.

37.
WARNING: This step requires the aid of
another technician.

CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

38.

marvelstar-store
 WARNING: Make sure that the transmission is secured with
suitable retaining straps.

Using a suitable hydraulic jack, support the transmission.

General Equipment: Transmission jack

39.

40.

41.

marvelstar-store
 42.
CAUTION: Discard the bolts

43.
NOTE: Using a suitable transmission jack
support the differential case.

44.

marvelstar-store
 WARNING: This step requires the aid of
another technician.

CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the dowels are still located on the

engine and not the transmission.

On removal and installation of the transmission,

make sure that the transmission does not damage the
brake pipe.

Make sure that the torque converter remains in the

transmission.

45.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the
component is removed for access only.

46.

47.

marvelstar-store
Published: 12-Aug-2016
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel - Charge Air Cooler
Removal and Installation

Removal

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining and Vacuum Filling

(303-03B Engine Cooling - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol - SULEV,
General Procedures).

3. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
- INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

4.

marvelstar-store
 5.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
coolant.

6.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
coolant.

7. Torque: 7 Nm

8.

marvelstar-store
 9.

10. Torque: 7 Nm

11.

marvelstar-store
 CAUTION: Remove and discard the O-ring
seals.

NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the

component is removed for access only.

Installation

1.
CAUTION: Install a new O-ring seals.

To install reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 14-Jun-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
General Procedures

Draining
WARNINGS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.

CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the area around the component is clean and free of foreign material.

Vehicle must be horizontal during this operation.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
- INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

2.
NOTE: Discard the sealing plug.

marvelstar-store
3. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
Removal and Installation).

4.
CAUTION: The ambient temperature should not
be below 20 degrees celsius.

NOTES:

Drain the fluid into a suitable container.

Discard the sealing plug.

Allow the fluid to drain until the flow stops.

5.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

Torque: 35 Nm

marvelstar-store
 6. Lower the Vehicle.

7. CAUTIONS:

Install a new sealing plug.

Use transmission fluid meeting Landrover

specification.

Fill the transmission with 3.5 litres of oil.

Refer to: Specifications (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, Specifications).
Torque: 35 Nm

8. Carry out transmission fluid level check.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

Published: 30-Jun-2015
Interior Trim and Ornamentation - Engine Cover INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1.

marvelstar-store
 2.

Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure

Published: 30-Sep-2014
Battery, Mounting and Cables -
General Specification - Stop-start and timed climate models:
Item Specification
Battery:
Type H7 AGM (VRLA)
Capacity 80Ah/800CCA

marvelstar-store
General Specification - All except stop-start and timed climate models
Item Specification
Battery:
Type H7 Flooded
Capacity 80Ah/700CCA

Battery Disconnect/Connect

CAUTION: The vehicle status must be established before attempting battery disconnect/connect. Reference must be
then made to the following table to establish the relevant procedure to be followed.

NOTE: Make a note of the customers radio preset stations.

Vehicle status Procedure

Vehicle without Telematics 1
Vehicle with Telematics 2

Procedure 1
Disconnect battery Connect battery
1. Chock the wheels 1. Make sure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
2. Open the hood 2. Connect battery ground cable to the battery - 6Nm
3. Remove the battery cover 3. Connect the BMS electrical connector
4. Disconnect the engine wiring harness 4. Connect the battery ground to starter motor connector/terminal (if equipped) -
ground connector/terminal 10Nm
5. Disconnect the battery ground to
starter motor connector/terminal (if 5. Connect the engine wiring harness ground connector/terminal - 6Nm
equipped)
6. Disconnect the battery monitoring
system (BMS) module electrical 6. Install the battery cover
connector
7. Disconnect the battery ground cable
7. Close the hood
from the battery
8. Switch the ignition on
9. Reset radio station preset stations
10. Reset the clock
11. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power window up to hard stop, release
switch, reapply and hold for 1 second (relay in door will click). One touch should now
work

Procedure 2
Disconnect battery Connect battery
1. Make sure the customer has placed
stolen vehicle tracking into Service Mode 1. Make sure that all electrical loads are switched OFF
(if equipped)
2. Chock the wheels 2. Connect battery ground cable to the battery - 6Nm
3. Open the hood 3. Connect the BMS electrical connector
4. Connect the battery ground to starter motor connector/terminal (if equipped) -
4. Remove the battery cover
10Nm
5. Disconnect the engine wiring harness
5. Connect the engine wiring harness ground connector/terminal - 6Nm
ground connector/terminal
6. Disconnect the battery ground to starter
6. Install the battery cover
motor connector/terminal (if equipped)
7. Disconnect the battery monitoring
7. Close the hood
system (BMS) module electrical connector
8. Disconnect the battery ground cable
8. Switch the ignition on
from the battery
9. Reset radio station preset stations
10. Reset the clock
11. Reset electric window one-touch facility. Power window up to hard stop,
release switch, reapply and hold for 1 second (relay in door will click). One touch
should now work
12. Request stolen vehicle tracking removed from Service Mode (if equipped)

Torque Specifications
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in
Vehicle body brace retaining bolts 25 18 -
Battery terminal nuts 6 - 53
Battery ground terminal nut - battery to starter motor retaining stud (if equipped) 10 7 -
Battery tray retaining bolts 10 7 -

marvelstar-store
Published: 18-Oct-2016
Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Halfshaft LH
Removal and Installation

Special Tool(s)
205-857
Remover, Halfshaft

307-520
Installer, Output Shaft Seal

JLR-307-686
Installer, Oil Seal

Removal

CAUTIONS:

Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle on the suspension.

Do not allow halfshafts to hang unsupported at one end or joint damage will occur.

Make sure the halfshaft constant velocity (CV) joints do not over articulate. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the CV joints.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).

3.
CAUTION: Discard the nut.

marvelstar-store
 4.

5. CAUTIONS:

Do not use air tools to remove the nut.

Discard the nut.

marvelstar-store
 6.
CAUTION: Discard the bolt.

NOTE: Right hand illustration shown, left hand is

similar.

7.
NOTE: Right hand illustration shown, left hand
is similar.

marvelstar-store
 8.
NOTE: Right hand illustration shown, left hand
is similar.

9. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the driveshaft is supported with

suitable retaining straps.

Do not use a hammer to detach the halfshaft from

the hub assembly, failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the halfshaft.

Special Tool(s): 205-857

10.
WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluids.

CAUTION: Keep the halfshaft horizontal to avoid

damaging the oil seal.

marvelstar-store
 11.
CAUTION: Discard the snap ring.

12.
CAUTION: Inspect the seal, replace if
damaged

NOTE: Automatic transmission shown, manual

transmission is similar.

Installation

1. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free
of corrosion and foreign material.

marvelstar-store
 Make sure the seal is installed correctly.

NOTE: This step is only required if previously

removed.

Special Tool(s): 307-520 , JLR-307-686

2. NOTES:

Do not fully engage the halfshaft until the oil seal

protector has been removed.

Manual transmission shown, automatic

transmission is similar.

To prevent oil seal damage use the protector when

installing the shaft into the transmission. It is not a
special tool but is available from the Parts Catalogue.

3. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the snap ring is installed from the

end of the halfshaft. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the vehicle.

Install a new snap ring.

marvelstar-store
 4. CAUTIONS:

Pull on the halfshaft inboard joint to make sure the

clip has fully engaged and retains the halfshaft inboard
joint within the transmission.

Keep the halfshaft horizontal to avoid damaging

the oil seal.

NOTES:

Do not fully engage the halfshaft until the oil seal

protector has been removed.

Manual transmission shown, automatic

transmission is similar.

5.

6.
NOTE: Right hand illustration shown, left hand
is similar.

marvelstar-store
 7.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is
installed.

NOTE: Right hand illustration shown, left hand is

similar.

Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:180°

8.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is
installed.

NOTE: Right hand illustration shown, left hand is

similar.

Torque:
Stage 1:90 Nm
Stage 2:120°

marvelstar-store
 9.
WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is
installed.

CAUTIONS:

Do not use air tools to install the nut. Failure to

follow this instruction may result in damage to the
component.

Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.

Tighten the nut without the weight of the vehicle

on the suspension.

Torque:
Stage 1:100 Nm
Stage 2:90°

10. Torque: 10 Nm

marvelstar-store
 11.
WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is
installed.

Torque: 65 Nm

12. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).

13. Manual transmission vehicles only: Check and top-up

the transmission fluid level.

14. Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by Land

Rover, check and adjust the wheel alignment.

Refer to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00 Suspension System - General

Information, General Procedures).

Published: 15-Oct-2014
Climate Control - Plenum Chamber
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTES:

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

marvelstar-store
LHD illustration shown, RHD is similar.

All vehicles

1. Refer to: Wiper Pivot Arm (501-16, Removal and Installation).

2. Repeat the above procedure for the other wiper arm.

3.

4.

5. Torque: 25 Nm

marvelstar-store
 6. Torque: 25 Nm

7.

8.

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Repeat the step for the other side.

9.
NOTE: Repeat the step for the other side.

Vehicles without heated washers

10.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluids.

marvelstar-store
Vehicles with heated washers

11.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluids.

All vehicles

12.

13.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is
removed for access only.

marvelstar-store
Vehicles without heated washers

14.

Vehicles with heated washers

15.

marvelstar-store
 All vehicles

16.
NOTE: Repeat the step for the other side.

Installation

marvelstar-store
 1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 30-Jun-2015
Starting System - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel - Starter Motor
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

All vehicles

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

Refer to: Specifications (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables,

Specifications).

3. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

4. Torque: 10 Nm

Vehicles with automatic transmission

marvelstar-store
 5.

Vehicles with manual transmission

6. Torque: 7 Nm

All vehicles

7.

marvelstar-store
 8. Torque: 48 Nm

Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 01-Oct-2013
Front End Body Panels - Engine Undershield
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

marvelstar-store
Raise and support the vehicle.

2.
NOTE: Loosen the bolt, but do not fully remove.

Torque: 10 Nm

3. Torque: 10 Nm

4.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the
component is removed for access only.

marvelstar-store
Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 18-Oct-2016
Front Drive Halfshafts - Front Halfshaft RH RHD AWD/LHD AWD
Removal and Installation

Special Tool(s)
205-857
Remover, Halfshaft

205-872
Installer, Transfer Case Seal

Removal

CAUTIONS:

Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle on the suspension.

Do not allow halfshafts to hang unsupported at one end or joint damage will occur.

Make sure the halfshaft constant velocity (CV) joints do not over articulate. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the CV joints.

marvelstar-store
1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).

3.
CAUTION: Discard the nut.

4.

5.
WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is
installed.

CAUTION: Discard the nut.

marvelstar-store
 6.
CAUTION: Discard the bolt.

7.

marvelstar-store
 8.

9. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the driveshaft is supported with

suitable retaining straps.

Do not use a hammer to detach the halfshaft from

the hub assembly, failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the halfshaft.

Special Tool(s): 205-857

10.

marvelstar-store
 11.
WARNING: Be prepared to collect escaping
fluids.

CAUTION: Keep the halfshaft horizontal to avoid

damaging the oil seal.

12. CAUTIONS:

Inspect the seal, replace if damaged

Take extra care not to damage the mating faces.

Installation

marvelstar-store
 1. CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free
of corrosion and foreign material.

Make sure the seal is installed correctly.

NOTE: This step is only required if previously

removed.

Special Tool(s): 205-872

2.
CAUTION: Keep the halfshaft horizontal to avoid
damaging the oil seal.

3.
CAUTION: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.

4. Torque: 25 Nm

marvelstar-store
 5.

6.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is
installed.

Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:180°

marvelstar-store
 7.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new bolt is
installed.

Torque:
Stage 1:90 Nm
Stage 2:120°

8.
WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is
installed.

CAUTIONS:

Do not use air tools to install the nut. Failure to

follow this instruction may result in damage to the
component.

Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.

Torque:
Stage 1:100 Nm
Stage 2:90°

marvelstar-store
 9. Torque: 10 Nm

10.
WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is
installed.

Torque: 65 Nm

11. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).

12.
CAUTION: The fluid filler plug is not a fluid
level plug.

Check and top-up the transfer case fluid level.

13. Using only four wheel alignment equipment approved by Land

Rover, check and adjust the wheel alignment.

marvelstar-store
Refer to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00 Suspension System - General
Information, General Procedures).

marvelstar-store
Published: 01-Oct-2013
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Level Check
General Procedures

Check
WARNINGS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.

CAUTION: Vehicle must be horizontal during this operation.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

2. Connect the Land Rover equipment.

3. Start and run the engine.

4. Select terrain response mode. Grass/Gravel/Snow.

5.
WARNING: Make sure that all four wheels are off the ground
for this step.

NOTE: Move the transmission control switch (TCS) from D to S

then using the steering paddles pause in each gear for a minimum 10
seconds until you reach 4th gear. (max 2000rpm)

Using the diagnostic equipment monitor the transmission fluid

temperature until 35 degrees celsius is reached.

6.
CAUTION: Decelerate the wheels until they stop, then turn
the (TCS) back into the P position.

Make sure that torque converter is full of oil by raising the engine
speed to 2000rpm for 10 seconds, return to idle speed.

7.
CAUTION: Engine must be running to carry out the fluid level
check.

8. CAUTIONS:

Transmission fluid temperature must not exceed 45

degrees celsius.

Discard the sealing plug.

Drain the fluid into a suitable container.

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: With the engine running a small amount of
automatic transmission fluid should drip out of the level
plug.

When transmission fluid temperature reaches 37 degrees

celsius, remove the level plug and wait until oil stops
dripping out.

9.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

If the transmission fluid does not come out of the

transmission fluid level plug hole the transmission fluid
level is insufficient. If this is the case add the
transmission fluid in 0.5 litre units into the transmission
fluid fill plug hole until fluid comes out.

Torque: 35 Nm

10.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

NOTE: If the temperature has exceeded 45 degrees

celsius before the plug is re-fitted, you must start the
procedure again.

Torque: 35 Nm

11. Switch off the engine.

marvelstar-store
 12. Remove the container.

13. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
Removal and Installation).

14. Lower the vehicle.

15. Disconnect the diagnostic tool.

Published: 01-Oct-2013
Front End Body Panels - Engine Undershield
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2.
NOTE: Loosen the bolt, but do not fully remove.

Torque: 10 Nm

3. Torque: 10 Nm

marvelstar-store
 4.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the
component is removed for access only.

Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

marvelstar-store
Published: 14-Jun-2016
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
General Procedures

Draining
WARNINGS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.

CAUTIONS:

Make sure that the area around the component is clean and free of foreign material.

Vehicle must be horizontal during this operation.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
- INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

2.
NOTE: Discard the sealing plug.

3. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

4.
CAUTION: The ambient temperature should not
be below 20 degrees celsius.

NOTES:

Drain the fluid into a suitable container.

Discard the sealing plug.

Allow the fluid to drain until the flow stops.

marvelstar-store
 5.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

Torque: 35 Nm

6. Lower the Vehicle.

7. CAUTIONS:

Install a new sealing plug.

Use transmission fluid meeting Landrover

specification.

Fill the transmission with 3.5 litres of oil.

Refer to: Specifications (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, Specifications).
Torque: 35 Nm

marvelstar-store
 8. Carry out transmission fluid level check.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle, General Procedures).

Published: 02-Oct-2015
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle -
Maintenance

CAUTION: Use only shell L12108 (ZF Lifeguard 8) Automatic transmission fluid. Use of any other fluids may result in a
transmission malfunction or failure.

Description Intervals
Normal maintenance Filled for life.
Severe duty maintenance Change the fluid at 48,000 km (30,000 miles) intervals.

Capacities
Litres
Transmission Fluid 6.5

Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives

Description Specification
9HP48 Transmission fluid Shell L12108 (ZF Lifeguard 8)
Metal surface cleaner WSW-M5B392-A
High temperature grease Molecote FB180
Connection sleeve grease IYX500050

Torque Specifications
Description Nm lb-ft lb-in
Main control valve body retaining bolts 8 - 71
Transmission control module 24 18 -
Torque converter retaining nuts 60 44 -
Transmission fluid cooler retaining bolts 10 - 88
Transmission fluid level plug 35 26 -
Transmission fluid drain plug 35 26 -
Transmission fluid fill plug 35 26 -
Transmission fluid pan retaining bolts 9 - 79
External oil feed pipe retaining bolts 10 - 88
Transmission end cover retaining bolts 10 - 88

Torque Specifications
Transmission Bolts Nm lb-ft lb-in
Diesel transmission retaining bolts 60 44 -
Petrol transmission retaining bolts 48 35 -

Published: 17-Nov-2015
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel - Air Cleaner
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1. Torque: 3.5 Nm

marvelstar-store
2. Torque: 8 Nm

3. Torque: 2 Nm

marvelstar-store
4. Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for access
only.

5.
CAUTION: Inspect the O-ring seal, install a new
component if damaged.

Torque: 1.9 Nm

6.

marvelstar-store
7.

8.

marvelstar-store
Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Published: 01-Oct-2013
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - Transmission Fluid Level Check
General Procedures

Check
WARNINGS:

Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.

CAUTION: Vehicle must be horizontal during this operation.

NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,

Removal and Installation).

2. Connect the Land Rover equipment.

3. Start and run the engine.

4. Select terrain response mode. Grass/Gravel/Snow.

marvelstar-store
5.
WARNING: Make sure that all four wheels are off the ground
for this step.

NOTE: Move the transmission control switch (TCS) from D to S

then using the steering paddles pause in each gear for a minimum 10
seconds until you reach 4th gear. (max 2000rpm)

Using the diagnostic equipment monitor the transmission fluid

temperature until 35 degrees celsius is reached.

6.
CAUTION: Decelerate the wheels until they stop, then turn
the (TCS) back into the P position.

Make sure that torque converter is full of oil by raising the engine
speed to 2000rpm for 10 seconds, return to idle speed.

7.
CAUTION: Engine must be running to carry out the fluid level
check.

8. CAUTIONS:

Transmission fluid temperature must not exceed 45

degrees celsius.

Discard the sealing plug.

Drain the fluid into a suitable container.

NOTE: With the engine running a small amount of

automatic transmission fluid should drip out of the level
plug.

When transmission fluid temperature reaches 37 degrees

celsius, remove the level plug and wait until oil stops
dripping out.

9.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

If the transmission fluid does not come out of the

transmission fluid level plug hole the transmission fluid
level is insufficient. If this is the case add the
transmission fluid in 0.5 litre units into the transmission
fluid fill plug hole until fluid comes out.

Torque: 35 Nm

marvelstar-store
 10.
CAUTION: Install a new sealing plug.

NOTE: If the temperature has exceeded 45 degrees

celsius before the plug is re-fitted, you must start the
procedure again.

Torque: 35 Nm

11. Switch off the engine.

12. Remove the container.

13. Refer to: Engine Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
Removal and Installation).

14. Lower the vehicle.

15. Disconnect the diagnostic tool.

Published: 01-Oct-2013
Front End Body Panels - Engine Undershield
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1.
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle
stands.

Raise and support the vehicle.

2.
NOTE: Loosen the bolt, but do not fully remove.

Torque: 10 Nm

marvelstar-store
3. Torque: 10 Nm

4.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the
component is removed for access only.

marvelstar-store
Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

marvelstar-store
Published: 15-Sep-2014
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - Transmission Cooling
Diagnosis and Testing

Principles of Operation

For a detailed description of the Automatic Transmission Cooling system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual. REFER to: Transmission Cooling (307-02 Transmission/Transaxle Cooling, Description and
Operation).

Inspection and Verification

CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.

NOTES:

If a control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component.

When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places, and with
an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into
account.

Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.

1. Verify the customer concern

2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity

Visual Inspection
Mechanical

Automatic transmission fluid cooler

Automatic transmission fluid leaks

3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding
to the next step

4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index

5. Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required

Symptom Chart

Symptom Possible Causes Action

Radiator airflow restricted

Check the radiator for external restrictions
Automatic transmission fluid
Flush out the automatic transmission fluid cooler with new
Automatic cooler internal
automatic transmission fluid. If the flushing is unsuccessful,
transmission restriction/blockage
install a new transmission fluid cooler
overheating Automatic transmission fluid
Check the operation of the thermostatic valve. Install a new
cooler internal failure -
automatic transmission fluid cooler as necessary
Thermostatic valve stuck closed

DTC Index

For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00. REFER to:
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Control Module (TCM) (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).

Published: 29-Sep-2016

marvelstar-store
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Transmission
Control Module (TCM)
Description and Operation

Transmission Control Module (TCM)

CAUTIONS:

Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not guarantee
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.

Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when carrying out repairs to the transmission or transmission components.

NOTES:

If a control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component.

Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the scan tool
to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read by the
manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).

When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places, and with
an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into
account.

Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.

Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.

If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be the
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.

Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required.

The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Transmission Control Module (TCM). For
additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop manual. For
additional information, refer to: Diagnostics - Vehicles With: 9HP48 9-Speed Automatic Transmission - AWD (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Diagnosis and Testing).

DTC Description Possible Causes Action

Engine speed
Engine Overspeed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
has exceeded
P0219-64 Condition - Signal engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
the maximum
plausibility failure relevant DTC index
plausible speed

Vehicle Speed Missing/invalid

Sensor A Circuit data from the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
P0501-64 Range/Performance anti-lock brake anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
- Signal plausibility system control refer to the relevant DTC index
failure module

Missing/invalid
Vehicle Speed
data from the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Sensor A Circuit
P0501-86 anti-lock brake anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
Range/Performance
system control refer to the relevant DTC index
- Signal invalid
module

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Circuit NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with
reference - VBATT / a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
GND - transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
System Voltage Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
P0561-62 Unstable - Signal
compare failure control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
power or ground transmission control module power and ground circuits for
circuit open open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
circuit, high necessary
resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - VBATT /
GND - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer
System Voltage Transmission to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the transmission
Low - Circuit control module
P0562-1C control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
voltage out of power or ground resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
range circuit open Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
circuit, high check the battery and charging system
resistance
Battery/charging
system fault

NOTE: Circuit
reference - VBATT /
GND - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer
System Voltage Transmission to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the transmission
Low - Signal control module
P0562-21 control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
amplitude < power or ground resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
minimum circuit open Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
circuit, high check the battery and charging system
resistance
Battery/charging
system fault

System Voltage Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check

High - Signal Battery/charging datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer
P0563-22
amplitude > system fault to the relevant section of the workshop manual and check the
maximum battery and charging system

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Serial perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Communication
P0600-04 control module
Link - System
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failures
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Internal Control perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Module Memory Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0601-41 Checksum Error - control module
General checksum internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
failure re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Internal Control perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Module Read Only Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0605-41 Memory (ROM) control module
Error - General internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
checksum failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Module Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0606-04 Processor - System control module
internal failures internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Module Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0606-62 Processor - Signal control module
compare failure internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Module Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0606-64 Processor - Signal control module
plausibility failure internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

Internal Control NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Module Monitoring perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Processor
P060A-04 control module
Performance -
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
System internal
failures DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
TCM Processor - Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0613-04 System internal control module
failures internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

TCM Processor - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Watchdog/safety
P0613-47 control module
microcontroller
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
failure
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_T /
N_OUT / SENSOR GND
-
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
Input shaft perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
speed sensor Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
circuit short
circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
ground, short datalogger signal - Turbine Speed (0x1E72). Refer to the
circuit to power, electrical circuit diagrams and check the input shaft speed
Internal Control open circuit, sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
Module Vehicle high resistance open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
P062C-86 Output shaft install a new sensor unit as necessary
Speed Performance
- Signal invalid speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
circuit short datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
circuit to (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
ground, short output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary

marvelstar-store
 circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
open circuit, DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
high resistance transmission control module
Transmission
control module
internal failure

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Internal Control perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Module EEPROM
P062F-04 control module
Error - System
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failures
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

Transmission
control module
previously NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
VIN Not installed on perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Programmed or another vehicle Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0631-62 Incompatible - TCM New
- Signal compare transmission Install the original or a new transmission control module as
failure control module necessary
installed and Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, configure
VIN not yet the transmission control module as a new module
programmed

NOTE: Circuit
reference - UDRMV1 /
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
UDRMV2 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure control
valves power
Actuator Supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
circuit open
Voltage A control valves power circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
P0657-13 circuit, high
Circuit/Open - Repair the wiring harness as necessary
resistance
Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the solenoid
Solenoid valves
valves power circuit for open circuit, high resistance. Repair
power circuit
the wiring harness as necessary
open circuit,
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - VS_9V /
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Sensor Reference Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Voltage A Circuit transmission
P06A6-01 Range/Performance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
sensor power or
- General electrical transmission sensor power and ground circuits for open circuit,
ground circuit
failure high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
open circuit,
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - VS_5V /
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Sensor Reference Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Voltage B Circuit transmission
P06A7-01 Range/Performance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
sensor power or
- General electrical transmission sensor power and ground circuits for open circuit,
ground circuit
failure high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
open circuit,
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

marvelstar-store
 Transmission NOTE: This DTC is for event information only and does not
Control System indicate a fault.
Transmission
P0700-02 (MIL Request) -
fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
General signal
failure other transmission related DTCs and perform the relevant
corrective actions

Transmission
Control System
Transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Range/Performance
P0701-98 cooling system check the transmission cooling system. Using the manufacturer
- Component or
fault approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest
system over
temperature

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Transmission perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Control System
P0702-04 control module
Electrical - System
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failures
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Transmission perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control System Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0702-06 Electrical - control module
Algorithm based internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
failures re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTES:

NOTE: Circuit
Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance
reference - T_OIL+ /
specification is 1 kΩ at 25°C.
T_OIL- -

Automatic
transmission After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Transmission Fluid routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Temperature fluid
temperature Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Sensor A Circuit -
P0710-27 sensor circuit
Signal rate of Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
change above short circuit to
ground, short datalogger signal - Transmission Oil Temperature (0x1E69).
threshold Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
circuit to power,
open circuit, transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
high resistance ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
Transmission Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
control module necessary
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTES:

Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance

NOTE: Circuit specification is 1 kΩ at 25°C.
reference - T_OIL+ /
T_OIL- -
After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Automatic routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission Fluid fluid
Temperature temperature Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
P0710-64 Sensor A Circuit - sensor circuit datalogger signal - Transmission Oil Temperature (0x1E69).
Signal plausibility short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
failure ground, short transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
circuit to power, ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
open circuit, Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
high resistance necessary
Transmission
control module
internal failure

marvelstar-store
 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTES:

Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance

NOTE: Circuit specification is 1 kΩ at 25°C.
reference - T_OIL+ /
T_OIL- -
After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Transmission Fluid Automatic routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Temperature transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0712-11 Sensor A Circuit fluid
Low - Circuit short temperature Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
to ground sensor circuit datalogger signal - Transmission Oil Temperature (0x1E69).
short circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
ground transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
Transmission ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
control module Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
internal failure necessary
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTES:

Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance

NOTE: Circuit specification is 1 kΩ at 25°C.
reference - T_OIL+ /
T_OIL- -
After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Automatic routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Fluid transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Temperature fluid
P0713-13
Sensor A Circuit temperature Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
High - Circuit open sensor circuit datalogger signal - Transmission Oil Temperature (0x1E69).
open circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
high resistance transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
Transmission ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
control module Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
internal failure necessary
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_T / NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Input shaft
Input/Turbine speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Shaft Speed circuit short datalogger signal - Turbine Speed (0x1E72). Refer to the
P0715-12 Sensor A Circuit - circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the input shaft speed
Circuit short to ground, short sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
battery circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
open circuit, install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_T / NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Input shaft
Input/Turbine
speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Shaft Speed
circuit short datalogger signal - Turbine Speed (0x1E72). Refer to the
Sensor A Circuit
P0716-64 circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the input shaft speed
ground, short
circuit to power,

marvelstar-store
 Range/Performance open circuit, sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
- Signal plausibility high resistance open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
failure Transmission install a new sensor unit as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_T / NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Input/Turbine Input shaft
Shaft Speed speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Sensor A Circuit No circuit short datalogger signal - Turbine Speed (0x1E72). Refer to the
P0717-14 circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the input shaft speed
Signal - Circuit
short to ground or ground, short sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
open circuit, install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Transmission Mode Automatic transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
P071A-07 Switch A Circuit - transmission Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Mechanical failures internal failure
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and perform a road test using all gears. If the fault
persists, install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

NOTE: Circuit perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
reference - N_OUT / Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
SENSOR GND -
Output Shaft Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Speed Sensor Output shaft datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
P0720-12 speed sensor (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Circuit - Circuit
short to battery circuit short output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to power.
circuit to power Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
Transmission necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_OUT / NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Output Shaft Output shaft
Speed Sensor speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Circuit circuit short datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
P0721-02 circuit to (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Range/Performance
- General signal ground, short output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
failure circuit to power, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
open circuit, wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - N_OUT / perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
SENSOR GND - Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Output shaft Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check

Output Shaft speed sensor datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
Speed Sensor circuit short (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Circuit circuit to
P0721-64
Range/Performance ground, short

marvelstar-store
 - Signal plausibility circuit to power, output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
failure open circuit, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
high resistance wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - N_OUT /
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
SENSOR GND -
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Output Shaft Output shaft

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Speed Sensor speed sensor
datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
P0722-14 Circuit No Signal - circuit short
(0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Circuit short to circuit to
output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
ground or open ground, open
open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
circuit, high
install a new sensor unit as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

Engine Speed Input

Circuit - Value of Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Engine system
P0725-83 signal protection engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
fault
calculation relevant DTC index
incorrect

NOTE: This DTC is always accompanied by other DTCs which

Stuck in Neutral - Automatic indicate which component is affected.
P072A-63 Circuit/component transmission
protection time-out internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
other transmission related DTCs and perform the relevant
corrective actions

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Stuck in Gear 4 -
P072F-07 transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures
internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Gear Automatic
P0730-00 Ratio - No sub type transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
information internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Unable to Engage Automatic
P073E-07 Reverse - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

marvelstar-store
 Torque NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with
converter a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
pressure control transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
valve solenoid Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
circuit short
circuit to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the torque
Torque Converter
ground, short converter pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
Clutch Circuit
circuit to power, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
P0741-07 Performance/Stuck resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Off - Mechanical open circuit,
high resistance as necessary
failures
Torque Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
converter or DTCs and perform a road test using all gears. If the fault
automatic persists, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
transmission and check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition:
internal failure - Automatic transmission fluid normal: Install a new torque
converter
- Automatic transmission fluid dirty or contaminated:
Install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Unable to Engage Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P074C-24 Gear 4 - Signal transmission check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
stuck high internal failure Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new valve body and drain and refill the automatic
transmission fluid. Clear the DTCs and perform a road test
using all gears. If the fault persists, install a new automatic
transmission

Output shaft
speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Output Speed
circuit short datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
Sensor Circuit -
circuit to (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
P077B-92 Direction Error -
ground, short output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
Performance or
circuit to power, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
incorrect operation
open circuit, wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance

Transmission Fluid NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Temperature perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Measurement Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P077E-64 System - Multiple control module
Sensor Correlation internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
- Signal plausibility DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
failure transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Error - Signal
P0780-62 control module
compare failure
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Error - No
P0780-93 control module
operation
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

marvelstar-store
 Transmission
Shift Error - control module NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
P0780-94 Unexpected internal failure perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
operation Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the

DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Engine system Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure Control fault
Solenoid C - Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
P0795-04 engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
System internal control module
failures is not configured relevant DTC index
correctly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - L3 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Park Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Position Park position
Sensor/Switch A sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
P07B3-11
Circuit Low - short circuit to position sensor circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair the
Circuit short to ground wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
ground Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - L3 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Park Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Park position
Position sensor circuit
Sensor/Switch A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
P07B4-15 short circuit to
Circuit High - position sensor circuit for short circuit to power, open circuit,
power, open
Circuit short to high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit, high
battery or open sensor unit as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - L4 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Park Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Position Park position
Sensor/Switch B sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
P07B9-11
Circuit Low - short circuit to position sensor circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair the
Circuit short to ground wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
ground Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - L4 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Park Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Park position
Position sensor circuit
Sensor/Switch B Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
P07BA-15 short circuit to
Circuit High - position sensor circuit for short circuit to power, open circuit,
power, open
Circuit short to high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit, high
battery or open sensor unit as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with
a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Transmission Mode Check the automatic transmission serial number:
transmission
P07D4-07 Switch F Circuit - internal failure - Serial number is less than 91782: Install a new
Mechanical failures automatic transmission
- Serial number is greater than 91781: Refer to the
relevant section of the workshop manual and check the
automatic transmission fluid level. Rectify any fluid leaks
and top up as necessary. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, re-configure the
transmission control module with the latest level
software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Gear 8 Incorrect Automatic
P07D9-07 Ratio - Mechanical transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07DC-07 from Gear 1 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07DD-07 from Gear 2 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07DE-07 from Gear 3 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift

marvelstar-store
P07DF-07 from Gear 4 - Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures transmission check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

Engine system NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

fault a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Accessory drive transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
belt components Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
incorrectly
installed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Driveline engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
imbalance relevant DTC index
Driveline Check the installation of the accessory drive belt components
Incorrect Shift components Check the driveline for debris around rotating components
P07E0-07 from Gear 5 - excessively Check the driveline for excessive wear or backlash
Mechanical failures worn Check the wheels and tires for snow or mud packing and
Wheel/tire correct balance
imbalance Check the engine mounts for damage
Engine mount Check the transmission mounts for damage
damaged Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Transmission check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
mount damaged Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
Automatic manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
transmission perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
internal failure a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07E1-07 from Gear 6 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07E2-07 from Gear 7 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

Engine system
fault NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with
Accessory drive a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
belt components transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
incorrectly Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
installed
Driveline Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
imbalance engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
Driveline relevant DTC index
components Check the installation of the accessory drive belt components
Incorrect Shift excessively Check the driveline for debris around rotating components
P07E3-07 from Gear 8 - worn Check the driveline for excessive wear or backlash
Mechanical failures Wheel/tire Check the wheels and tires for snow or mud packing and
imbalance correct balance
Engine mount Check the engine mounts for damage
damaged Check the transmission mounts for damage
Transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
mount damaged check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and

marvelstar-store
 Automatic perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
transmission a new automatic transmission
internal failure

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the

DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
(5.5Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
Park position ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
Unable to Engage sensor valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
P07E4-64 Park - Signal mountings loose in the Removal Instructions referenced below).For additional
plausibility failure Valve block information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
internal failure Transmission/Transaxle)
Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
SULEV (Removal and Installation),
Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check the automatic transmission serial number:

Automatic - Serial number is less than 81206: Install a new
Stuck in Drive - automatic transmission
P07E7-07 transmission
Mechanical failures - Serial number is greater than 81205: Refer to the
internal failure
relevant section of the workshop manual and check the
automatic transmission fluid level. Rectify any fluid leaks
and top up as necessary. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, re-configure the
transmission control module with the latest level
software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Gear 9 Incorrect Automatic
P07F6-07 Ratio - Mechanical transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07FA-07 From Gear 9 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

One or more NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

automatic perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

marvelstar-store
 Reverse Inhibit solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Control short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Circuit/Open - ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P0801-94 Unexpected circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
operation open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for

other park lock related DTCs and perform the relevant
corrective actions
NOTE: Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
reference - P-SIG - engaged signal circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
Park lock fault harness as necessary
Park lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
engaged signal DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
circuit short position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Park/Neutral circuit to (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Switch Output ground, short position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
P084F-29
Circuit - Signal circuit to power, ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
invalid open circuit, valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
high resistance in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
Park position tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
sensor additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
mountings loose Transmission/Transaxle)
Transmission Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
control module SULEV (Removal and Installation),
internal failure Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check parklock mechanism by engaging and disengaging the

parking lock several times. Check that the service park release
NOTE: Circuit lever is in the normal position
reference - L3 / L4 - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
position sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
Service park to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
release lever in harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
release position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
Park position solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
sensor circuit power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
short circuit to or install a new solenoid as necessary
ground, short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
circuit to power, DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Park/Neutral open circuit, position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Switch Input high resistance (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
P0850-29
Circuit - Signal Park lock position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
invalid solenoid circuit ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
short circuit to valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
ground, short in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
circuit to power, tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
open circuit, additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
high resistance Transmission/Transaxle)
Park position Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
sensor SULEV (Removal and Installation),
mountings loose Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).

marvelstar-store
 Park lock The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
mechanical adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
failure boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Multiple Gears Automatic
P0893-07 Engaged - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - VOUT_PR -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure sensor
Hydraulic Pressure signal circuit
Sensor Circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
P0932-14 short circuit to
Circuit short to sensor signal circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
ground, open
ground or open high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit, high
pressure sensor as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - VOUT_PR -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Hydraulic Pressure Pressure sensor
Sensor signal circuit
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
P0933-62 Range/Performance short circuit to
sensor signal circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
- Signal compare ground, open
high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
failure circuit, high
pressure sensor as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - VOUT_PR - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Hydraulic Pressure Pressure sensor
Sensor Circuit High signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
P0935-12
- Circuit short to short circuit to sensor signal circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the
battery power wiring harness or install a new pressure sensor as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Hydraulic Pressure Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Sensor Circuit Automatic
P0936-64 Intermittent - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Signal plausibility internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
failure Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Hydraulic Pressure Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

marvelstar-store
P0942-62 Unit - Signal Transmission
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
compare failure control module
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT5 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure Control System pressure
Solenoid A Control control valve Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the system
P0962-11 Circuit Low - solenoid circuit pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to short circuit to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid as
ground ground necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT5 - NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
System pressure Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure Control control valve
Solenoid A Control solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the system
P0963-15 Circuit High - short circuit to pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to power, open power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
battery or open circuit, high or install a new solenoid as necessary
resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT6 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Dog clutch 'A'
Shift Solenoid A solenoid circuit
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the dog
P0973-14 short circuit to
- Circuit short to clutch 'A' solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, open
ground, open
ground or open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a
circuit, high
new solenoid as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT6 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid A Dog clutch 'A'
Control Circuit High solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the dog
P0974-12
- Circuit short to short circuit to clutch 'A' solenoid circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the
battery power wiring harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT0 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid B Multiplate clutch
Control Circuit 'B' pressure
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0975-19 Range/Performance control valve
clutch 'B' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
- Circuit current solenoid circuit
to power. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid as
above threshold short circuit to
necessary
power
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
Shift Solenoid B reference - OUT0 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Circuit Low Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0976-11 Multiplate clutch
- Circuit short to
ground 'B' pressure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
control valve clutch 'B' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
solenoid circuit to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
short circuit to as necessary
ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT0 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Multiplate clutch
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
'B' pressure
Shift Solenoid B control valve
Control Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the Multiplate
P0977-15 solenoid circuit
- Circuit short to clutch 'B' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
short circuit to
battery or open to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
power, open
harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
circuit, high
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT1 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid C Multiplate clutch
Control Circuit 'C' pressure
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0978-19 Range/Performance control valve
clutch 'C' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
- Circuit current solenoid circuit
to power. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid as
above threshold short circuit to
necessary
power
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT1 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid C 'C' pressure
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0979-11 control valve
- Circuit short to clutch 'C' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
solenoid circuit
ground to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
short circuit to
as necessary
ground
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT1 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Multiplate clutch
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
'C' pressure
Shift Solenoid C control valve
Control Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0980-15 solenoid circuit
- Circuit short to clutch 'C' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
short circuit to
battery or open to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
power, open
harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
circuit, high
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT2 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Shift Solenoid D Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Control Circuit Multiplate clutch
P0981-19 Range/Performance 'D' pressure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
- Circuit current control valve clutch 'D' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
above threshold solenoid circuit circuit to power. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
short circuit to solenoid as necessary
power Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT2 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid D 'D' pressure
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0982-11 control valve
- Circuit short to clutch 'D' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
solenoid circuit
ground circuit to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
short circuit to
solenoid as necessary
ground
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT2 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Multiplate clutch
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
'D' pressure
Shift Solenoid D control valve
Control Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0983-15 solenoid circuit
- Circuit short to clutch 'D' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
short circuit to
battery or open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
power, open
harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
circuit, high
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT3 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid E Multiplate clutch
Control Circuit 'E' pressure
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0984-19 Range/Performance control valve
clutch 'E' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
- Circuit current solenoid circuit
to power. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid as
above threshold short circuit to
necessary
power
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT3 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid E 'E' pressure
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0985-11 control valve
- Circuit short to clutch 'E' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
solenoid circuit
ground to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
short circuit to
as necessary
ground
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT3 -

marvelstar-store
 Multiplate clutch
'E' pressure NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
Shift Solenoid E control valve perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Circuit High solenoid circuit Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0986-15
- Circuit short to short circuit to
battery or open power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
circuit, high clutch 'E' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
resistance to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
Transmission harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT7 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Dog clutch 'F'
Shift Solenoid F solenoid circuit
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the dog
P0998-14 short circuit to
- Circuit short to clutch 'F' solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, open
ground, open
ground or open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a
circuit, high
new solenoid as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT7 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid F Dog clutch 'F'
Control Circuit High solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the dog
P0999-12
- Circuit short to short circuit to clutch 'F' solenoid circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the
battery power wiring harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT8 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Park lock
Shift Solenoid G solenoid circuit
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
P099B-14 short circuit to
- Circuit short to solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
ground, open
ground or open resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
circuit, high
as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT8 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid G Park lock
Control Circuit High solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
P099C-12
- Circuit short to short circuit to solenoid circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the wiring
battery power harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT9 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Park lock control
solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
Shift Solenoid H short circuit to control solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
Control Circuit Low ground, open high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
P099E-14
- Circuit short to circuit, high solenoid as necessary
ground or open resistance

marvelstar-store
 Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT9 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid H Park lock control
Control Circuit High solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
P099F-12
- Circuit short to short circuit to control solenoid circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the
battery power wiring harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

Internal Control
Engine system
Module Start-Stop Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
fault
P164C-62 Performance - engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
- Stop/start
Signal compare relevant DTC index
system
failure

Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park

position sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
NOTE: Circuit DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
reference - L3 / L4 - position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
(6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Park position position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
High Vehicle Speed sensor circuit ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
Observed in Park - short circuit to valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
P1706-94 ground, short
Unexpected in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
operation circuit to power, tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
open circuit, additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
high resistance Transmission/Transaxle)
Park position Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
sensor SULEV (Removal and Installation),
mountings loose Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check that the service park release lever is in the normal

position
NOTE: Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
reference - OUT8 - solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
Service park or install a new solenoid as necessary
release lever in Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
release position DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Transfer Case Park lock position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Neutral or solenoid circuit (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Park/Neutral short circuit to position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
P1707-72 ground, short ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
Indication Circuit -
Actuator stuck circuit to power, valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
open open circuit, in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
high resistance tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
Park position additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
sensor Transmission/Transaxle)
mountings loose Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
Park lock SULEV (Removal and Installation),
mechanical Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
failure and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -
Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check that the service park release lever is in the normal

position
NOTE: Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
reference - OUT8 - solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
Service park or install a new solenoid as necessary
release lever in Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
release position DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Park lock position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Transfer Case solenoid circuit (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Neutral or short circuit to position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
P1707-74 Park/Neutral ground, short ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
Indication Circuit - circuit to power, valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
Actuator slipping open circuit, in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
high resistance tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
Park position additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
sensor Transmission/Transaxle)
mountings loose Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
Park lock SULEV (Removal and Installation),
mechanical Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
failure and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check that the service park release lever is in the normal

position
NOTE: Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
reference - OUT8 - solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
Service park or install a new solenoid as necessary
release lever in Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
release position DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Transfer Case Park lock position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Neutral or solenoid circuit (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Park/Neutral short circuit to position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
P1707-77 Indication Circuit - ground, short ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
Commanded circuit to power, valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
position not open circuit, in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
reachable high resistance tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
Park position additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
sensor Transmission/Transaxle)
mountings loose Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
Park lock SULEV (Removal and Installation),
mechanical Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
failure and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Transmission
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Control Module
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P1710-86 Solenoid/Internal
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
Ground Circuit -
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
Signal invalid
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

marvelstar-store
 Missing/invalid NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
data from the perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
anti-lock brake Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
system control
module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Output shaft anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
Output Shaft
speed sensor refer to the relevant DTC index
Speed / ABS Wheel
circuit short Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
P174E-62 Speed Correlation -
circuit to datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
Signal compare
ground, short (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
failure
circuit to power, output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
open circuit, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
high resistance wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Pressure Solenoid
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Control System
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P1758-19 Incorrect Current -
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
Circuit current
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
above threshold
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Pressure Solenoid
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Control System
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P1758-62 Incorrect Current -
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
Signal compare
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
failure
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Clutch Solenoid
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P1770-04 Circuit - System
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
internal failures
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Friction Element B
P177F-07 transmission check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
or D - Mechanical
internal failure Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
failures
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and

marvelstar-store
 perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Automatic
Friction Element B Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P178A-07 transmission
or E - Mechanical check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Automatic
Friction Element C Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P178C-07 transmission
or E - Mechanical check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Automatic
Friction Element D Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P178D-07 transmission
or E - Mechanical check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Clutch Control
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
System
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P181F-18 Performance -
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
Circuit current
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
below threshold
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P2544-86 Request Input control module
Signal A - Signal internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
invalid re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Request Input
P2545-86 control module
Signal A Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
internal failure
Range/Performance re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
- Signal invalid level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

marvelstar-store
 Torque NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
Management Transmission perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
control module Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P2546-86 Request Input
Signal A Low - internal failure
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Signal invalid
re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P2547-86 Request Input control module
Signal A High - internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Signal invalid re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P2638-86 Feedback Signal A control module
Range/Performance internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
- Signal invalid re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Transmission transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Friction Element B Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Apply Time
P2701-07 transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Range/Performance
internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
- Mechanical
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Transmission transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Friction Element C Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Apply Time
P2702-07 transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Range/Performance
internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
- Mechanical
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Transmission transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Friction Element D Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Apply Time
P2703-07 transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Range/Performance
internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
- Mechanical
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Transmission Check the automatic transmission serial number:

marvelstar-store
 Friction Element E Automatic - Serial number is less than 63584: Install a new
P2704-07 Apply Time transmission automatic transmission
Range/Performance internal failure - Serial number is greater than 63583: Refer to the
- Mechanical relevant section of the workshop manual and check the
failures automatic transmission fluid level. Rectify any fluid leaks
and top up as necessary. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, re-configure the
transmission control module with the latest level
software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for

other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
One or more circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
automatic resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
transmission as necessary
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
short circuit to DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Unexpected ground, short position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Mechanical Gear circuit to power, (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
P2711-94 Disengagement - open circuit, position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
Unexpected high resistance ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
operation Park position valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
sensor in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
mountings loose tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
Transmission additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
control module Transmission/Transaxle)
internal failure Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
SULEV (Removal and Installation),
Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT4 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Torque
Torque Converter Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
converter
Clutch Pressure pressure control
Control Solenoid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the torque
P2763-15 valve solenoid
Control Circuit High converter pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
circuit short
- Circuit short to circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
circuit to power,
battery or open harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
open circuit,
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT4 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Torque Converter Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Torque
Clutch Pressure converter
Control Solenoid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the torque
P2764-11 pressure control
Control Circuit Low converter pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
valve solenoid
- Circuit short to circuit to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit short
ground solenoid as necessary
circuit to ground
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTES:

marvelstar-store
 This DTC may be induced by the driver using the paddle
switches excessively.
Paddle switch
fault
Clutch Automatic This DTC may be induced by a paddle switch fault that causes
Temperature Too transmission excessive gear shifts.
P2787-4B High - Over fluid level low
temperature Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
cooling system paddle switch related DTCs and perform the relevant corrective
fault actions
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
check the transmission cooling system. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Gear Shift Direction short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Circuit - ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P2793-94
Unexpected circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
operation open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

Invalid data
High Speed CAN received from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Communication another control snapshot data to determine the invalid data source control
U0001-81
Bus - Invalid serial module via the module. Check the relevant control module for related DTCs
data received high speed CAN and refer to the relevant DTC index
bus (powertrain)

High Speed CAN Invalid data

Communication received from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Bus - another control snapshot data to determine the invalid data source control
U0001-82
Alive/sequence module via the module. Check the relevant control module for related DTCs
counter incorrect / high speed CAN and refer to the relevant DTC index
not updated bus (powertrain)

High Speed CAN Invalid data

Communication received from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Bus - Value of another control snapshot data to determine the invalid data source control
U0001-83
signal protection module via the module. Check the relevant control module for related DTCs
calculation high speed CAN and refer to the relevant DTC index
incorrect bus (powertrain)

Invalid signal
received from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
High Speed CAN
another control snapshot data to determine the invalid signal source control
U0001-86 Communication
module via the module. Check the relevant control module for related DTCs
Bus - Signal invalid
high speed CAN and refer to the relevant DTC index
bus (powertrain)

Missing message
High Speed CAN from another Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Communication control module snapshot data to determine the missing message source
U0001-87
Bus - Missing via the high control module. Check the relevant control module for related
message speed CAN bus DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
(powertrain)

Engine control
module power

marvelstar-store
 or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the engine
open circuit, control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
Control Module
bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Communication
U0073-00 circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
Bus A Off - No sub
circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
type information
ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
open circuit, engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
high resistance relevant DTC index
Engine system
fault

Engine control
module power
or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the engine
open circuit, control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
Lost
bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Communication
U0100-87 circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
With ECM/PCM A -
circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Missing message
ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
open circuit, engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
high resistance relevant DTC index
Engine system
fault

Anti-lock brake
system control
module power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the anti-lock
or ground circuit brake system control module power and ground circuits for
open circuit, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
Lost
high resistance necessary
Communication
High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
With Anti-Lock
bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
U0121-87 Brake System
circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
(ABS) Control
circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Module - Missing
ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
message
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
open circuit, anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
high resistance refer to the relevant DTC index
Anti-lock brake
system fault

Car NOTE: After updating the car configuration file, set the ignition
configuration file to on and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs.
Internal Control mismatch with
Module Software vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
U0300-00 Incompatibility - specification and up-date the car configuration file as necessary. Clear the
No sub type Transmission DTCs and retest
information control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
is not configured re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
correctly level software

NOTES:

After updating the car configuration file, set the ignition to on

Car and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs.
configuration file
mismatch with
Software vehicle After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Incompatibility specification routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
with Transmission Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
U0302-57 Control Module - control module
Invalid/incomplete is not configured Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
software correctly and up-date the car configuration file as necessary. Clear the
component DTCs and retest

marvelstar-store
 Incorrect Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
transmission re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
control module level software
installed Install a new transmission control module as necessary

Invalid Data
Missing/invalid
Received From Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
data from the
U0401-02 ECM/PCM A - engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
engine control
General signal relevant DTC index
module
failure

Invalid Data
Missing/invalid
Received From Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
data from the
U0401-64 ECM/PCM A - engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
engine control
Signal plausibility relevant DTC index
module
failure

Invalid Data
Missing/invalid
Received From Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
data from the
U0401-67 ECM/PCM A - engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
engine control
Signal incorrect relevant DTC index
module
after event
Invalid Data
Received From Missing/invalid
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
ECM/PCM A - data from the
U0401-82 engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
Alive/sequence engine control
relevant DTC index
counter incorrect / module
not updated
Invalid Data
Received From Missing/invalid
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
ECM/PCM A - Value data from the
U0401-83 engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
of signal protection engine control
relevant DTC index
calculation module
incorrect

Invalid Data
Received From NOTE: This DTC is set when the automatic transmission output
Missing/invalid shaft speed rate of change is implausible. This can occur if the brakes
Anti-Lock Brake
data from the lock during braking because of an anti-lock brake system fault.
System (ABS)
U0415-27 anti-lock brake
Control Module -
system control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Signal rate of
module anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
change above
threshold refer to the relevant DTC index

Anti-lock brake
system control
module power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the anti-lock
or ground circuit brake system control module power and ground circuits for
Invalid Data open circuit, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
Received From high resistance necessary
Anti-Lock Brake High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
System (ABS) bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
U0415-82
Control Module - circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
Alive/sequence circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
counter incorrect / ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
not updated circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
open circuit, anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
high resistance refer to the relevant DTC index
Anti-lock brake
system fault

Anti-lock brake
system control
module power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the anti-lock
or ground circuit brake system control module power and ground circuits for
Invalid Data open circuit, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
Received From high resistance necessary
Anti-Lock Brake High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
System (ABS) bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
U0415-83 Control Module - circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
Value of signal circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
protection ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
calculation circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
incorrect open circuit, anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
high resistance refer to the relevant DTC index

marvelstar-store
 Anti-lock brake
system fault

NOTE: Circuit
reference - IGN -

Missing/invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the

Invalid Data data from the central junction box for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Received From central junction DTC index
U0422-86 Body Control box Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the ignition
Module - Signal Ignition signal signal circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
invalid circuit short open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
circuit to necessary
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance

NOTES:

Transmission After updating the car configuration file, set the ignition to on
control module and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs.
is not configured
correctly
Control Module Car After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Configuration configuration file routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
U2101-56 Incompatible - mismatch with Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Invalid/incomplete vehicle
configuration specification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Incorrect re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
transmission level software
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
installed and up-date the car configuration file as necessary. Clear the
DTCs and retest
Install a new transmission control module as necessary

Mis-match NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

between perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Module - transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
U3000-56 Invalid/incomplete control module
configuration configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, configure
and valve block the transmission control module as a new module. Perform
specification routine - Transmission Valve Block. Clear the DTCs and retest.
If the fault persists, install a new transmission control module

Control Module -
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Component or Engine system
U3000-9A engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
system operating fault
relevant DTC index
conditions

Published: 30-Sep-2014
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - Transmission Cooling
Description and Operation

COMPONENT LOCATION - ZF 9HP48 TRANSMISSION TD4 2.2L DIESEL

marvelstar-store
Item Description
1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) cooler
COMPONENT LOCATION - ZF 9HP48 TRANSMISSION GTDi 2.0L PETROL

Item Description
1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) cooler

marvelstar-store
OVERVIEW

The ZF 9HP48 automatic transmission uses an external ATF (automatic transmission fluid) cooler to reduce the temperature of
the transmission fluid.

A plate type cooler uses engine coolant to reduce the ATF temperature.

DESCRIPTION

Item Description
1 Engine coolant inlet
2 Engine coolant outlet
3 Torx screw (3 off)
4 ATF Cooler
5 Seals
The ATF cooler is located on the transmission main casing. The ATF cooler is an aluminium housing comprising louvred fins
and plates. The plates allow a cross-flow of ATF and engine coolant through the ATF cooler. The plates are immersed in the
engine coolant from the 'cold' side of the radiator which provides cooling of the ATF by the temperature differential between
the ATF and the engine coolant.

marvelstar-store
The engine cooling system has a low temperature zone in the top third of the radiator. The engine coolant flow through this
section of the radiator is restricted by the ATF cooler. Therefore the engine coolant has a slower flow rate across the cooling
tubes of this section of the radiator. This cools the engine coolant more than the lower part of the radiator and consequently
provides increased cooling of the ATF .

The ATF cooler has an integral thermostatic valve, which controls the ATF flow through the cooler. Flow is restricted to
improve ATF warm-up time. The thermostatic valve is closed at temperatures of 78°C (172°F) and below, starts to open at
temperatures of between 78 and 84°C (172 and 183°F) and is fully open at temperatures of 96°C (204°F) and higher.

OPERATION

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Cooler

Engine coolant is circulated through the ATF cooler which cools the ATF flowing through the ATF cooler by the temperature
differential between the two fluids.

marvelstar-store
Published: 30-Sep-2014
Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - Transmission Cooling
Description and Operation

COMPONENT LOCATION - ZF 9HP48 TRANSMISSION TD4 2.2L DIESEL

Item Description
1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) cooler
COMPONENT LOCATION - ZF 9HP48 TRANSMISSION GTDi 2.0L PETROL

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) cooler

OVERVIEW

The ZF 9HP48 automatic transmission uses an external ATF (automatic transmission fluid) cooler to reduce the temperature of
the transmission fluid.

A plate type cooler uses engine coolant to reduce the ATF temperature.

DESCRIPTION

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Engine coolant inlet
2 Engine coolant outlet
3 Torx screw (3 off)
4 ATF Cooler
5 Seals
The ATF cooler is located on the transmission main casing. The ATF cooler is an aluminium housing comprising louvred fins
and plates. The plates allow a cross-flow of ATF and engine coolant through the ATF cooler. The plates are immersed in the
engine coolant from the 'cold' side of the radiator which provides cooling of the ATF by the temperature differential between
the ATF and the engine coolant.

The engine cooling system has a low temperature zone in the top third of the radiator. The engine coolant flow through this
section of the radiator is restricted by the ATF cooler. Therefore the engine coolant has a slower flow rate across the cooling
tubes of this section of the radiator. This cools the engine coolant more than the lower part of the radiator and consequently
provides increased cooling of the ATF .

The ATF cooler has an integral thermostatic valve, which controls the ATF flow through the cooler. Flow is restricted to
improve ATF warm-up time. The thermostatic valve is closed at temperatures of 78°C (172°F) and below, starts to open at
temperatures of between 78 and 84°C (172 and 183°F) and is fully open at temperatures of 96°C (204°F) and higher.

OPERATION

marvelstar-store
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) Cooler

Engine coolant is circulated through the ATF cooler which cools the ATF flowing through the ATF cooler by the temperature
differential between the two fluids.

marvelstar-store
Published: 26-Aug-2014
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - External Controls
Diagnosis and Testing

Principles of Operation

For a detailed description of the Automatic Transmission External Controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls, Description and Operation).

Inspection and Verification

CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.

NOTES:

If a control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component.

When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places, and with
an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into
account.

Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.

1. Verify the customer concern

2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity

Visual Inspection
Electrical

Fuses
Wiring harnesses and connectors
Transmission control module
Transmission control switch

3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding
to the next step

4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index

5. Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required

DTC Index

For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Control Module (TCM) (100-00 General Information,
Description and Operation) /
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).

Published: 29-Sep-2016
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Transmission
Control Module (TCM)
Description and Operation

Transmission Control Module (TCM)

CAUTIONS:

marvelstar-store
 Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not guarantee
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.

Extreme cleanliness must be exercised when carrying out repairs to the transmission or transmission components.

NOTES:

If a control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component.

Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the scan tool
to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read by the
manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).

When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places, and with
an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into
account.

Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.

Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.

If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be the
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.

Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required.

The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Transmission Control Module (TCM). For
additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop manual. For
additional information, refer to: Diagnostics - Vehicles With: 9HP48 9-Speed Automatic Transmission - AWD (307-01
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle, Diagnosis and Testing).

DTC Description Possible Causes Action

Engine speed
Engine Overspeed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
has exceeded
P0219-64 Condition - Signal engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
the maximum
plausibility failure relevant DTC index
plausible speed

Vehicle Speed Missing/invalid

Sensor A Circuit data from the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
P0501-64 Range/Performance anti-lock brake anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
- Signal plausibility system control refer to the relevant DTC index
failure module

Missing/invalid
Vehicle Speed
data from the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Sensor A Circuit
P0501-86 anti-lock brake anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
Range/Performance
system control refer to the relevant DTC index
- Signal invalid
module

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

reference - VBATT / a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
GND - transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
System Voltage
power or ground transmission control module power and ground circuits for
P0561-62 Unstable - Signal
circuit open open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
compare failure
circuit, high necessary
resistance

marvelstar-store
 Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - VBATT /
GND - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer
System Voltage Transmission to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the transmission
Low - Circuit control module
P0562-1C control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
voltage out of power or ground resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
range circuit open Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
circuit, high check the battery and charging system
resistance
Battery/charging
system fault

NOTE: Circuit
reference - VBATT /
GND - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer
System Voltage Transmission to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the transmission
Low - Signal control module
P0562-21 control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
amplitude < power or ground resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
minimum circuit open Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
circuit, high check the battery and charging system
resistance
Battery/charging
system fault

System Voltage Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check

High - Signal Battery/charging datalogger signal - Main ECU Supply Voltage (0xDD02). Refer
P0563-22
amplitude > system fault to the relevant section of the workshop manual and check the
maximum battery and charging system

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Serial perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Communication
P0600-04 control module
Link - System
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failures
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Internal Control perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Module Memory Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0601-41 Checksum Error - control module
General checksum internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
failure re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Internal Control perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Module Read Only Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0605-41 Memory (ROM) control module
Error - General internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
checksum failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Module Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0606-04 Processor - System control module
internal failures internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
Control Module Transmission perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
P0606-62 Processor - Signal control module Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
compare failure internal failure
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Module Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0606-64 Processor - Signal control module
plausibility failure internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

Internal Control NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Module Monitoring perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Processor
P060A-04 control module
Performance -
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
System internal
failures DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
TCM Processor - Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0613-04 System internal control module
failures internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

TCM Processor - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Watchdog/safety
P0613-47 control module
microcontroller
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
failure
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_T /
N_OUT / SENSOR GND
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
-
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Input shaft
speed sensor
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
circuit short
datalogger signal - Turbine Speed (0x1E72). Refer to the
circuit to
electrical circuit diagrams and check the input shaft speed
ground, short
Internal Control sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
circuit to power,
Module Vehicle open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
P062C-86 open circuit,
Speed Performance install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance
- Signal invalid Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Output shaft
datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
speed sensor
(0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
circuit short
output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
circuit to
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
ground, short
wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
circuit to power,
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
open circuit,
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
high resistance
transmission control module
Transmission
control module
internal failure

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Internal Control
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Module EEPROM
P062F-04

marvelstar-store
 Error - System Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failures control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

Transmission
control module
previously NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
VIN Not installed on perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Programmed or another vehicle Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0631-62 Incompatible - TCM New
- Signal compare transmission Install the original or a new transmission control module as
failure control module necessary
installed and Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, configure
VIN not yet the transmission control module as a new module
programmed

NOTE: Circuit
reference - UDRMV1 /
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
UDRMV2 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure control
valves power
Actuator Supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
circuit open
Voltage A control valves power circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
P0657-13 circuit, high
Circuit/Open - Repair the wiring harness as necessary
resistance
Circuit open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the solenoid
Solenoid valves
valves power circuit for open circuit, high resistance. Repair
power circuit
the wiring harness as necessary
open circuit,
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - VS_9V /
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Sensor Reference Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Voltage A Circuit transmission
P06A6-01 Range/Performance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
sensor power or
- General electrical transmission sensor power and ground circuits for open circuit,
ground circuit
failure high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
open circuit,
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - VS_5V /
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Sensor Reference Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Voltage B Circuit transmission
P06A7-01 Range/Performance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
sensor power or
- General electrical transmission sensor power and ground circuits for open circuit,
ground circuit
failure high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
open circuit,
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

Transmission NOTE: This DTC is for event information only and does not
Control System indicate a fault.
Transmission
P0700-02 (MIL Request) -
fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
General signal
failure other transmission related DTCs and perform the relevant
corrective actions

Transmission
Control System
Range/Performance

marvelstar-store
P0701-98 - Component or Transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
system over cooling system check the transmission cooling system. Using the manufacturer
temperature fault approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Transmission perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Control System
P0702-04 control module
Electrical - System
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failures
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Transmission perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control System Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0702-06 Electrical - control module
Algorithm based internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
failures re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTES:

NOTE: Circuit
Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance
reference - T_OIL+ /
specification is 1 kΩ at 25°C.
T_OIL- -

Automatic
transmission After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Transmission Fluid routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Temperature fluid
temperature Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Sensor A Circuit -
P0710-27 sensor circuit
Signal rate of Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
change above short circuit to
ground, short datalogger signal - Transmission Oil Temperature (0x1E69).
threshold Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
circuit to power,
open circuit, transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
high resistance ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
Transmission Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
control module necessary
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTES:

NOTE: Circuit
Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance
reference - T_OIL+ /
specification is 1 kΩ at 25°C.
T_OIL- -

Automatic
transmission After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Transmission Fluid fluid routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Temperature temperature Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0710-64 Sensor A Circuit - sensor circuit
Signal plausibility short circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
failure ground, short datalogger signal - Transmission Oil Temperature (0x1E69).
circuit to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
open circuit, transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
high resistance ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
Transmission Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
control module necessary
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTES:

Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance

specification is 1 kΩ at 25°C.
NOTE: Circuit
reference - T_OIL+ /
T_OIL- -

marvelstar-store
 Automatic
Transmission Fluid After installing a new transmission control module, perform
transmission
Temperature routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
fluid
P0712-11 Sensor A Circuit Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
temperature
Low - Circuit short
sensor circuit
to ground Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
short circuit to
ground datalogger signal - Transmission Oil Temperature (0x1E69).
Transmission Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
control module transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
internal failure ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
necessary
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTES:

Automatic transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance

NOTE: Circuit specification is 1 kΩ at 25°C.
reference - T_OIL+ /
T_OIL- -
After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Automatic routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Fluid transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Temperature fluid
P0713-13
Sensor A Circuit temperature Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
High - Circuit open sensor circuit datalogger signal - Transmission Oil Temperature (0x1E69).
open circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the automatic
high resistance transmission fluid temperature sensor circuit for short circuit to
Transmission ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance.
control module Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
internal failure necessary
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_T / NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Input shaft
Input/Turbine speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Shaft Speed circuit short datalogger signal - Turbine Speed (0x1E72). Refer to the
P0715-12 Sensor A Circuit - circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the input shaft speed
Circuit short to ground, short sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
battery circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
open circuit, install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_T / NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Input/Turbine Input shaft
Shaft Speed speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Sensor A Circuit circuit short datalogger signal - Turbine Speed (0x1E72). Refer to the
P0716-64 circuit to electrical circuit diagrams and check the input shaft speed
Range/Performance
- Signal plausibility ground, short sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
failure circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
open circuit, install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_T /
SENSOR GND -

marvelstar-store
 Input/Turbine Input shaft
speed sensor NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
Shaft Speed
circuit short perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Sensor A Circuit No
P0717-14 Signal - Circuit circuit to Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
short to ground or ground, short
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
open circuit to power,
datalogger signal - Turbine Speed (0x1E72). Refer to the
open circuit,
electrical circuit diagrams and check the input shaft speed
high resistance
sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
Transmission
open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
control module
install a new sensor unit as necessary
internal failure
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Transmission Mode Automatic transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
P071A-07 Switch A Circuit - transmission Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Mechanical failures internal failure
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and perform a road test using all gears. If the fault
persists, install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

NOTE: Circuit perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
reference - N_OUT / Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
SENSOR GND -
Output Shaft Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Speed Sensor Output shaft datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
P0720-12 speed sensor (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Circuit - Circuit
short to battery circuit short output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to power.
circuit to power Repair the wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as
Transmission necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_OUT / NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Output Shaft Output shaft
Speed Sensor speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Circuit circuit short datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
P0721-02 circuit to (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Range/Performance
- General signal ground, short output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
failure circuit to power, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
open circuit, wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - N_OUT / NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
SENSOR GND - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Output Shaft Output shaft
Speed Sensor speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Circuit circuit short datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
P0721-64 circuit to (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Range/Performance
- Signal plausibility ground, short output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
failure circuit to power, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
open circuit, wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - N_OUT / perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
SENSOR GND - Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Output Shaft
Speed Sensor Output shaft Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
P0722-14 Circuit No Signal - speed sensor datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
Circuit short to circuit short (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
ground or open circuit to output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
ground, open open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or
circuit, high install a new sensor unit as necessary
resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

Engine Speed Input

Circuit - Value of Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Engine system
P0725-83 signal protection engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
fault
calculation relevant DTC index
incorrect

NOTE: This DTC is always accompanied by other DTCs which

Stuck in Neutral - Automatic indicate which component is affected.
P072A-63 Circuit/component transmission
protection time-out internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
other transmission related DTCs and perform the relevant
corrective actions

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Stuck in Gear 4 -
P072F-07 transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures
internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Gear Automatic
P0730-00 Ratio - No sub type transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
information internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Unable to Engage Automatic
P073E-07 Reverse - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

Torque a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
converter transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
pressure control Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
valve solenoid
circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the torque
circuit to converter pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short

marvelstar-store
 Torque Converter ground, short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
P0741-07 Clutch Circuit circuit to power, resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Performance/Stuck open circuit, as necessary
Off - Mechanical high resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
failures Torque DTCs and perform a road test using all gears. If the fault
converter or persists, refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
automatic and check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition:
transmission - Automatic transmission fluid normal: Install a new torque
internal failure converter
- Automatic transmission fluid dirty or contaminated:
Install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Unable to Engage Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P074C-24 Gear 4 - Signal transmission check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
stuck high internal failure Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new valve body and drain and refill the automatic
transmission fluid. Clear the DTCs and perform a road test
using all gears. If the fault persists, install a new automatic
transmission

Output shaft
speed sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Output Speed
circuit short datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
Sensor Circuit -
circuit to (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
P077B-92 Direction Error -
ground, short output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
Performance or
circuit to power, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
incorrect operation
open circuit, wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
high resistance

Transmission Fluid NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Temperature perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Measurement Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P077E-64 System - Multiple control module
Sensor Correlation internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
- Signal plausibility DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
failure transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Error - Signal
P0780-62 control module
compare failure
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Error - No
P0780-93 control module
operation
internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Shift Error - Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0780-94 Unexpected control module
operation internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

marvelstar-store
 Engine system NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
fault perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Pressure Control Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Solenoid C -
P0795-04 System internal control module
is not configured Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
failures engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
correctly
relevant DTC index
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - L3 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Park Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Position Park position
Sensor/Switch A sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
P07B3-11
Circuit Low - short circuit to position sensor circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair the
Circuit short to ground wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
ground Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - L3 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Park Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Park position
Position sensor circuit
Sensor/Switch A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
P07B4-15 short circuit to
Circuit High - position sensor circuit for short circuit to power, open circuit,
power, open
Circuit short to high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit, high
battery or open sensor unit as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - L4 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Park Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Position Park position
Sensor/Switch B sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
P07B9-11
Circuit Low - short circuit to position sensor circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair the
Circuit short to ground wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
ground Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - L4 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Transmission Park Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Park position
Position sensor circuit
Sensor/Switch B Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
P07BA-15 short circuit to
Circuit High - position sensor circuit for short circuit to power, open circuit,
power, open
Circuit short to high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit, high
battery or open sensor unit as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check the automatic transmission serial number:

- Serial number is less than 91782: Install a new
Transmission Mode Automatic automatic transmission
P07D4-07 Switch F Circuit - transmission - Serial number is greater than 91781: Refer to the
Mechanical failures internal failure relevant section of the workshop manual and check the

marvelstar-store
 automatic transmission fluid level. Rectify any fluid leaks
and top up as necessary. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, re-configure the
transmission control module with the latest level
software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Gear 8 Incorrect Automatic
P07D9-07 Ratio - Mechanical transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07DC-07 from Gear 1 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07DD-07 from Gear 2 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07DE-07 from Gear 3 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07DF-07 from Gear 4 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

Engine system
fault

marvelstar-store
 Accessory drive
belt components NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with
incorrectly a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
installed transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Driveline Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
imbalance
Driveline Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
components engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
Incorrect Shift excessively relevant DTC index
P07E0-07 from Gear 5 - worn Check the installation of the accessory drive belt components
Mechanical failures Wheel/tire Check the driveline for debris around rotating components
imbalance Check the driveline for excessive wear or backlash
Engine mount Check the wheels and tires for snow or mud packing and
damaged correct balance
Transmission Check the engine mounts for damage
mount damaged Check the transmission mounts for damage
Automatic Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
transmission check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07E1-07 from Gear 6 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07E2-07 from Gear 7 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

Engine system NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

fault a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Accessory drive transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
belt components Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
incorrectly
installed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Driveline engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
imbalance relevant DTC index
Driveline Check the installation of the accessory drive belt components
Incorrect Shift components Check the driveline for debris around rotating components
P07E3-07 from Gear 8 - excessively Check the driveline for excessive wear or backlash
Mechanical failures worn Check the wheels and tires for snow or mud packing and
Wheel/tire correct balance
imbalance Check the engine mounts for damage
Engine mount Check the transmission mounts for damage
damaged Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Transmission check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
mount damaged Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
Automatic manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
transmission perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
internal failure a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

marvelstar-store
 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
(5.5Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
Park position
ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
sensor
Unable to Engage valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
mountings loose
P07E4-64 Park - Signal in the Removal Instructions referenced below).For additional
Valve block
plausibility failure information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
internal failure
Transmission/Transaxle)
Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
SULEV (Removal and Installation),
Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check the automatic transmission serial number:

Automatic - Serial number is less than 81206: Install a new
Stuck in Drive - automatic transmission
P07E7-07 transmission
Mechanical failures - Serial number is greater than 81205: Refer to the
internal failure
relevant section of the workshop manual and check the
automatic transmission fluid level. Rectify any fluid leaks
and top up as necessary. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, re-configure the
transmission control module with the latest level
software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Gear 9 Incorrect Automatic
P07F6-07 Ratio - Mechanical transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Incorrect Shift Automatic
P07FA-07 From Gear 9 - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Mechanical failures internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Reverse Inhibit other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
short circuit to
Control corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground, short
P0801-94 Circuit/Open - check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
circuit to power,
Unexpected circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
open circuit,
operation resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
high resistance
as necessary

marvelstar-store
 Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for

other park lock related DTCs and perform the relevant
corrective actions
NOTE: Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
reference - P-SIG - engaged signal circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
Park lock fault harness as necessary
Park lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
engaged signal DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
circuit short position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Park/Neutral circuit to (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Switch Output ground, short position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
P084F-29
Circuit - Signal circuit to power, ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
invalid open circuit, valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
high resistance in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
Park position tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
sensor additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
mountings loose Transmission/Transaxle)
Transmission Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
control module SULEV (Removal and Installation),
internal failure Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check parklock mechanism by engaging and disengaging the

NOTE: Circuit parking lock several times. Check that the service park release
reference - L3 / L4 - lever is in the normal position
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park
Service park position sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
release lever in to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
release position harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
Park position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
sensor circuit solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
ground, short or install a new solenoid as necessary
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Park/Neutral open circuit, DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Switch Input high resistance position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
P0850-29
Circuit - Signal Park lock (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
invalid solenoid circuit position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
short circuit to ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
ground, short valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
circuit to power, in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
open circuit, tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
high resistance additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
Park position Transmission/Transaxle)
sensor Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
mountings loose SULEV (Removal and Installation),
Park lock Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
mechanical and Installation).
failure The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with
Automatic a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Multiple Gears transmission transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
P0893-07 Engaged - internal failure Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Mechanical failures
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - VOUT_PR -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure sensor
Hydraulic Pressure signal circuit
Sensor Circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
P0932-14 short circuit to
Circuit short to sensor signal circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
ground, open
ground or open high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit, high
pressure sensor as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - VOUT_PR -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Hydraulic Pressure Pressure sensor
Sensor signal circuit
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
P0933-62 Range/Performance short circuit to
sensor signal circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
- Signal compare ground, open
high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
failure circuit, high
pressure sensor as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - VOUT_PR - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Hydraulic Pressure Pressure sensor
Sensor Circuit High signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the pressure
P0935-12
- Circuit short to short circuit to sensor signal circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the
battery power wiring harness or install a new pressure sensor as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Hydraulic Pressure Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Sensor Circuit Automatic
P0936-64 Intermittent - transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Signal plausibility internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
failure Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Hydraulic Pressure Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P0942-62 Unit - Signal control module
compare failure internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT5 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Pressure Control Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Solenoid A Control System pressure
P0962-11 Circuit Low - control valve Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the system
Circuit short to solenoid circuit pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit to
ground short circuit to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid as
ground necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT5 - NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
System pressure Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Pressure Control control valve
Solenoid A Control solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the system
P0963-15 Circuit High - short circuit to pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit to
Circuit short to power, open power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
battery or open circuit, high or install a new solenoid as necessary
resistance Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT6 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Dog clutch 'A'
Shift Solenoid A solenoid circuit
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the dog
P0973-14 short circuit to
- Circuit short to clutch 'A' solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, open
ground, open
ground or open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a
circuit, high
new solenoid as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT6 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid A Dog clutch 'A'
Control Circuit High solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the dog
P0974-12
- Circuit short to short circuit to clutch 'A' solenoid circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the
battery power wiring harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT0 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid B Multiplate clutch
Control Circuit 'B' pressure
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0975-19 Range/Performance control valve
clutch 'B' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
- Circuit current solenoid circuit
to power. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid as
above threshold short circuit to
necessary
power
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

NOTE: Circuit perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
reference - OUT0 - Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid B 'B' pressure
Control Circuit Low control valve

marvelstar-store
P0976-11 - Circuit short to solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
ground short circuit to clutch 'B' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
ground to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT0 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Multiplate clutch
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
'B' pressure
Shift Solenoid B control valve
Control Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the Multiplate
P0977-15 solenoid circuit
- Circuit short to clutch 'B' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
short circuit to
battery or open to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
power, open
harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
circuit, high
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT1 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid C Multiplate clutch
Control Circuit 'C' pressure
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0978-19 Range/Performance control valve
clutch 'C' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
- Circuit current solenoid circuit
to power. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid as
above threshold short circuit to
necessary
power
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT1 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid C 'C' pressure
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0979-11 control valve
- Circuit short to clutch 'C' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
solenoid circuit
ground to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
short circuit to
as necessary
ground
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT1 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Multiplate clutch
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
'C' pressure
Shift Solenoid C control valve
Control Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0980-15 solenoid circuit
- Circuit short to clutch 'C' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
short circuit to
battery or open to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
power, open
harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
circuit, high
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

NOTE: Circuit perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
reference - OUT2 - Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid D 'D' pressure
Control Circuit control valve

marvelstar-store
P0981-19 Range/Performance solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
- Circuit current short circuit to clutch 'D' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
above threshold power circuit to power. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
Transmission solenoid as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT2 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid D 'D' pressure
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0982-11 control valve
- Circuit short to clutch 'D' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
solenoid circuit
ground circuit to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
short circuit to
solenoid as necessary
ground
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT2 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Multiplate clutch
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
'D' pressure
Shift Solenoid D control valve
Control Circuit High Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0983-15 solenoid circuit
- Circuit short to clutch 'D' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
short circuit to
battery or open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
power, open
harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
circuit, high
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT3 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid E Multiplate clutch
Control Circuit 'E' pressure
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0984-19 Range/Performance control valve
clutch 'E' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
- Circuit current solenoid circuit
to power. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid as
above threshold short circuit to
necessary
power
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT3 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Multiplate clutch
Shift Solenoid E 'E' pressure
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
P0985-11 control valve
- Circuit short to clutch 'E' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
solenoid circuit
ground to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
short circuit to
as necessary
ground
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT3 - NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Multiplate clutch Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
'E' pressure
Shift Solenoid E control valve Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the multiplate
Control Circuit High solenoid circuit clutch 'E' pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short circuit
P0986-15 short circuit to to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
- Circuit short to
battery or open power, open harness or install a new solenoid as necessary

marvelstar-store
 circuit, high Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
resistance DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT7 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Dog clutch 'F'
Shift Solenoid F solenoid circuit
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the dog
P0998-14 short circuit to
- Circuit short to clutch 'F' solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, open
ground, open
ground or open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a
circuit, high
new solenoid as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT7 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid F Dog clutch 'F'
Control Circuit High solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the dog
P0999-12
- Circuit short to short circuit to clutch 'F' solenoid circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the
battery power wiring harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT8 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Park lock
Shift Solenoid G solenoid circuit
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
P099B-14 short circuit to
- Circuit short to solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
ground, open
ground or open resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
circuit, high
as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT8 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Shift Solenoid G Park lock
Control Circuit High solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
P099C-12
- Circuit short to short circuit to solenoid circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the wiring
battery power harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT9 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Park lock control
Shift Solenoid H solenoid circuit
Control Circuit Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
P099E-14 short circuit to
- Circuit short to control solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit,
ground, open
ground or open high resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit, high
solenoid as necessary
resistance
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

reference - OUT9 - perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

marvelstar-store
 Shift Solenoid H Park lock control
P099F-12 Control Circuit High solenoid circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
- Circuit short to short circuit to control solenoid circuit for short circuit to power. Repair the
battery power wiring harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
control module DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
internal failure transmission control module

Internal Control
Engine system
Module Start-Stop Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
fault
P164C-62 Performance - engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
- Stop/start
Signal compare relevant DTC index
system
failure

Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park

position sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
NOTE: Circuit DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
reference - L3 / L4 - position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
(6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Park position position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
High Vehicle Speed sensor circuit ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
Observed in Park - short circuit to valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
P1706-94 ground, short
Unexpected in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
operation circuit to power, tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
open circuit, additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
high resistance Transmission/Transaxle)
Park position Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
sensor SULEV (Removal and Installation),
mountings loose Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check that the service park release lever is in the normal

position
NOTE: Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
reference - OUT8 - solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
Service park or install a new solenoid as necessary
release lever in Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
release position DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Transfer Case Park lock position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Neutral or solenoid circuit (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Park/Neutral short circuit to position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
P1707-72 ground, short ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
Indication Circuit -
Actuator stuck circuit to power, valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
open open circuit, in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
high resistance tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
Park position additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
sensor Transmission/Transaxle)
mountings loose Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
Park lock SULEV (Removal and Installation),
mechanical Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
failure and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check that the service park release lever is in the normal

position
NOTE: Circuit
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
reference - OUT8 -
solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to

marvelstar-store
 Service park power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
release lever in or install a new solenoid as necessary
release position Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Park lock DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
solenoid circuit position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Transfer Case (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
short circuit to
Neutral or position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
ground, short
P1707-74 Park/Neutral ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
circuit to power,
Indication Circuit - valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
open circuit,
Actuator slipping in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
high resistance
Park position tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
sensor additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
mountings loose Transmission/Transaxle)
Park lock Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
mechanical SULEV (Removal and Installation),
failure Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: After installing a new valve block, perform routines -

Transmission Valve Block, Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Check that the service park release lever is in the normal

position
NOTE: Circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the park lock
reference - OUT8 - solenoid circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness
Service park or install a new solenoid as necessary
release lever in Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
release position DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Transfer Case Park lock position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Neutral or solenoid circuit (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
Park/Neutral short circuit to position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
P1707-77 Indication Circuit - ground, short ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
Commanded circuit to power, valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
position not open circuit, in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
reachable high resistance tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
Park position additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
sensor Transmission/Transaxle)
mountings loose Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
Park lock SULEV (Removal and Installation),
mechanical Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
failure and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new valve block

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Transmission
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Control Module
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P1710-86 Solenoid/Internal
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
Ground Circuit -
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
Signal invalid
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

Missing/invalid NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

data from the perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
anti-lock brake Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
system control
module

marvelstar-store
 Output shaft Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Output Shaft
speed sensor anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
Speed / ABS Wheel
circuit short refer to the relevant DTC index
P174E-62 Speed Correlation -
circuit to Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Signal compare
ground, short datalogger signal - Transmission Output Shaft Speed
failure
circuit to power, (0x1E68). Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
open circuit, output shaft speed sensor circuit for short circuit to ground,
high resistance short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the
Transmission wiring harness or install a new sensor unit as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Pressure Solenoid
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Control System
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P1758-19 Incorrect Current -
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
Circuit current
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
above threshold
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Pressure Solenoid
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Control System
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P1758-62 Incorrect Current -
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
Signal compare
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
failure
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Clutch Solenoid
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P1770-04 Circuit - System
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
internal failures
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Automatic
Friction Element B Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P177F-07 transmission
or D - Mechanical check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

marvelstar-store
 Automatic NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
Transmission
transmission perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Friction Element B
internal failure Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P178A-07 or E - Mechanical
failures Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Automatic
Friction Element C Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P178C-07 transmission
or E - Mechanical check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Automatic
Friction Element D Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
P178D-07 transmission
or E - Mechanical check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
internal failure
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Clutch Control
short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
System
ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P181F-18 Performance -
circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
Circuit current
open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
below threshold
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P2544-86 Request Input control module
Signal A - Signal internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
invalid re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Transmission
Request Input
P2545-86 control module
Signal A Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
internal failure
Range/Performance re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
- Signal invalid level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

Torque NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Management perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Request Input Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

marvelstar-store
P2546-86 Signal A Low - Transmission
Signal invalid control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
internal failure re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P2547-86 Request Input control module
Signal A High - internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Signal invalid re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

Torque perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Management Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
P2638-86 Feedback Signal A control module
Range/Performance internal failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
- Signal invalid re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new transmission control module

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Transmission transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Friction Element B Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Apply Time
P2701-07 transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Range/Performance
internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
- Mechanical
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Transmission transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Friction Element C Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Apply Time
P2702-07 transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Range/Performance
internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
- Mechanical
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
Transmission transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Friction Element D Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Automatic
Apply Time
P2703-07 transmission Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
Range/Performance
internal failure check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
- Mechanical
failures Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and
perform a road test using all gears. If the fault persists, install
a new automatic transmission

NOTE: A new automatic transmission is supplied complete with

a new transmission control module. After installing a new automatic
transmission, perform routines - Configure New Module (Including
Transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Transmission Check the automatic transmission serial number:

Friction Element E - Serial number is less than 63584: Install a new
Automatic automatic transmission
Apply Time
P2704-07 transmission - Serial number is greater than 63583: Refer to the
internal failure relevant section of the workshop manual and check the

marvelstar-store
 Range/Performance automatic transmission fluid level. Rectify any fluid leaks
- Mechanical and top up as necessary. Using the manufacturer
failures approved diagnostic system, re-configure the
transmission control module with the latest level
software. Clear the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists,
install a new automatic transmission

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for

other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
One or more circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
automatic resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
transmission as necessary
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
short circuit to DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, check that the park
Unexpected ground, short position sensor mounting is secured at the correct torque
Mechanical Gear circuit to power, (6Nm) and rectify as required. To gain access to the park
P2711-94 Disengagement - open circuit, position sensor mounting, it is first necessary to remove the
Unexpected high resistance ten mounting bolts of the main control valve body and lift the
operation Park position valve body unit from the transmission housing (see Steps 1 - 5
sensor in the Removal Instructions referenced below). NOTE: New oil
mountings loose tubes must be installed when the unit is reassembled. For
Transmission additional information, refer to: (307-01 Automatic
control module Transmission/Transaxle)
internal failure Main Control Valve Body - GTDi 2.0L Petrol/GTDi 2.0L Petrol -
SULEV (Removal and Installation),
Main Control Valve Body - INGENIUM I4 2.0L Diesel (Removal
and Installation).
The park position sensor is located inside the main casing,
adjacent to the electrical connector. The sensor is secured to a
boss in the main casing with a screw
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

NOTE: Circuit
reference - OUT4 -
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Torque
Torque Converter Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
converter
Clutch Pressure pressure control
Control Solenoid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the torque
P2763-15 valve solenoid
Control Circuit High converter pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
circuit short
- Circuit short to circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
circuit to power,
battery or open harness or install a new solenoid as necessary
open circuit,
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
high resistance
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Transmission
transmission control module
control module
internal failure

NOTE: Circuit
NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,
reference - OUT4 -
perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Torque Converter Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Torque
Clutch Pressure converter
Control Solenoid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the torque
P2764-11 pressure control
Control Circuit Low converter pressure control valve solenoid circuit for short
valve solenoid
- Circuit short to circuit to ground. Repair the wiring harness or install a new
circuit short
ground solenoid as necessary
circuit to ground
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
Transmission
DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
control module
transmission control module
internal failure

NOTES:

This DTC may be induced by the driver using the paddle

switches excessively.

marvelstar-store
 Paddle switch
fault This DTC may be induced by a paddle switch fault that causes
Clutch Automatic excessive gear shifts.
Temperature Too transmission
P2787-4B
High - Over fluid level low Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
temperature Transmission paddle switch related DTCs and perform the relevant corrective
cooling system actions
fault Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
check the automatic transmission fluid level and condition.
Rectify any fluid leaks and top up as necessary
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
check the transmission cooling system. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest

NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

One or more perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
automatic Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
transmission
solenoid circuits Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for
Gear Shift Direction short circuit to other solenoid circuit related DTCs and perform the relevant
Circuit - ground, short corrective actions. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P2793-94
Unexpected circuit to power, check the automatic transmission solenoid circuits for short
operation open circuit, circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness or install a new solenoid
Transmission as necessary
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the
internal failure DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control module

Invalid data
High Speed CAN received from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Communication another control snapshot data to determine the invalid data source control
U0001-81
Bus - Invalid serial module via the module. Check the relevant control module for related DTCs
data received high speed CAN and refer to the relevant DTC index
bus (powertrain)

High Speed CAN Invalid data

Communication received from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Bus - another control snapshot data to determine the invalid data source control
U0001-82
Alive/sequence module via the module. Check the relevant control module for related DTCs
counter incorrect / high speed CAN and refer to the relevant DTC index
not updated bus (powertrain)

High Speed CAN Invalid data

Communication received from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Bus - Value of another control snapshot data to determine the invalid data source control
U0001-83
signal protection module via the module. Check the relevant control module for related DTCs
calculation high speed CAN and refer to the relevant DTC index
incorrect bus (powertrain)

Invalid signal
received from Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
High Speed CAN
another control snapshot data to determine the invalid signal source control
U0001-86 Communication
module via the module. Check the relevant control module for related DTCs
Bus - Signal invalid
high speed CAN and refer to the relevant DTC index
bus (powertrain)

Missing message
High Speed CAN from another Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Communication control module snapshot data to determine the missing message source
U0001-87
Bus - Missing via the high control module. Check the relevant control module for related
message speed CAN bus DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
(powertrain)

Engine control
module power
or ground circuit
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the engine
open circuit,
control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
high resistance
resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary

marvelstar-store
 Control Module High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
Communication bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
U0073-00
Bus A Off - No sub circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
type information circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
open circuit, engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
high resistance relevant DTC index
Engine system
fault

Engine control
module power
or ground circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the engine
open circuit, control module power and ground circuits for open circuit, high
high resistance resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
Lost
bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
Communication
U0100-87 circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
With ECM/PCM A -
circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Missing message
ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
open circuit, engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
high resistance relevant DTC index
Engine system
fault

Anti-lock brake
system control
module power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the anti-lock
or ground circuit brake system control module power and ground circuits for
open circuit, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
Lost
high resistance necessary
Communication
High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
With Anti-Lock
bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
U0121-87 Brake System
circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
(ABS) Control
circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Module - Missing
ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
message
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
open circuit, anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
high resistance refer to the relevant DTC index
Anti-lock brake
system fault

Car NOTE: After updating the car configuration file, set the ignition
configuration file to on and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs.
Internal Control mismatch with
Module Software vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
U0300-00 Incompatibility - specification and up-date the car configuration file as necessary. Clear the
No sub type Transmission DTCs and retest
information control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
is not configured re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
correctly level software

NOTES:

Car After updating the car configuration file, set the ignition to on
configuration file and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs.
mismatch with
Software vehicle
Incompatibility specification After installing a new transmission control module, perform
with Transmission Transmission routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
U0302-57 Control Module - control module Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Invalid/incomplete is not configured
software correctly Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
component Incorrect and up-date the car configuration file as necessary. Clear the
transmission DTCs and retest
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
installed re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
level software
Install a new transmission control module as necessary

marvelstar-store
 Invalid Data Missing/invalid
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
U0401-02 Received From data from the
engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
ECM/PCM A - engine control
relevant DTC index
General signal module
failure
Invalid Data
Missing/invalid
Received From Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
data from the
U0401-64 ECM/PCM A - engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
engine control
Signal plausibility relevant DTC index
module
failure

Invalid Data
Missing/invalid
Received From Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
data from the
U0401-67 ECM/PCM A - engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
engine control
Signal incorrect relevant DTC index
module
after event
Invalid Data
Received From Missing/invalid
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
ECM/PCM A - data from the
U0401-82 engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
Alive/sequence engine control
relevant DTC index
counter incorrect / module
not updated
Invalid Data
Received From Missing/invalid
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
ECM/PCM A - Value data from the
U0401-83 engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
of signal protection engine control
relevant DTC index
calculation module
incorrect

Invalid Data
Received From NOTE: This DTC is set when the automatic transmission output
Missing/invalid shaft speed rate of change is implausible. This can occur if the brakes
Anti-Lock Brake
data from the lock during braking because of an anti-lock brake system fault.
System (ABS)
U0415-27 anti-lock brake
Control Module -
system control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Signal rate of
module anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
change above
threshold refer to the relevant DTC index

Anti-lock brake
system control
module power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the anti-lock
or ground circuit brake system control module power and ground circuits for
Invalid Data open circuit, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
Received From high resistance necessary
Anti-Lock Brake High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
System (ABS) bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
U0415-82
Control Module - circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
Alive/sequence circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
counter incorrect / ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
not updated circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
open circuit, anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
high resistance refer to the relevant DTC index
Anti-lock brake
system fault

Anti-lock brake
system control
module power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the anti-lock
or ground circuit brake system control module power and ground circuits for
Invalid Data
open circuit, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
Received From
high resistance necessary
Anti-Lock Brake
High speed CAN Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a
System (ABS)
bus (powertrain) CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
U0415-83 Control Module -
circuit short diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus (powertrain)
Value of signal
circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
protection
ground, short circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as necessary
calculation
circuit to power, Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
incorrect
open circuit, anti-lock brake system control module for related DTCs and
high resistance refer to the relevant DTC index
Anti-lock brake
system fault

marvelstar-store
 NOTE: Circuit
reference - IGN - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
central junction box for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Invalid Data Missing/invalid DTC index
Received From data from the Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the ignition
U0422-86 Body Control central junction signal circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
Module - Signal box open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring harness as
invalid Ignition signal necessary
circuit short
circuit to
ground, short
circuit to power,
open circuit,
high resistance

NOTES:

Transmission After updating the car configuration file, set the ignition to on
control module and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs.
is not configured
correctly
Control Module Car After installing a new transmission control module, perform
Configuration configuration file routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
U2101-56 Incompatible - mismatch with Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
Invalid/incomplete vehicle
configuration specification Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Incorrect re-configure the transmission control module with the latest
transmission level software
control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
installed and up-date the car configuration file as necessary. Clear the
DTCs and retest
Install a new transmission control module as necessary

Mis-match NOTE: After installing a new transmission control module,

between perform routines - Configure New Module (Without Transmission
Control Module - transmission Replacement), Transmission Control Module Adaption.
U3000-56 Invalid/incomplete control module
configuration configuration Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, configure
and valve block the transmission control module as a new module. Perform
specification routine - Transmission Valve Block. Clear the DTCs and retest.
If the fault persists, install a new transmission control module

Control Module -
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
Component or Engine system
U3000-9A engine control module for related DTCs and refer to the
system operating fault
relevant DTC index
conditions

Published: 30-Sep-2014
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - External Controls
Description and Operation

COMPONENT LOCATION

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Downshift paddle switch
2 Upshift paddle switch
3 Transmission Control Switch (TCS)

OVERVIEW

The external controls comprise a rotary TCS (transmission control switch) and two steering wheel mounted paddle switches.

The TCS transmits driver transmission selections to the TCM (transmission control module) for transmission mode selections.
The paddle switches allow the driver to initiate gear shifts in all transmission modes; 'D' drive, 'S' manual CommandShift™.

DESCRIPTION

TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH

The TCS is a rotary switch installed in the floor console and controls the driver transmission selections.

The TCM allows the transmission to be operated as a conventional automatic unit by selecting P R N D on the TCS . Rotation
of the TCS allows the selection of P R N D S. Depressing and rotating the TCS clockwise from the D position, S mode can be
selected. The TCS is a fully electronic rotary transmission switch with no mechanical connection to the transmission.
Mechanical operation of the transmission corresponding to selections made on the TCS is performed by the TCM on the
transmission casing.
For additional information, refer to: Transmission Description (307-01, Description and Operation).

The TCS rises from its housing once the engine is running. When the engine is stopped, with the TCS in any position other
than 'N', it retracts into the housing again. If the TCS is in position 'N' when the engine is stopped, it remains in the raised
position for up to 10 minutes, for use in a drive-through car wash for example. After 10 minutes the TCS automatically
retracts. The TCS also retracts if 'P' is selected within the 10 minute period. If the TCS does not rise from the housing when
the engine is started, but electrical power is supplied to the TCS , the retracted TCS can still be rotated to make selections.

If electrical power to the TCS is lost, the TCS will not rise from the housing when the engine is started and the retracted TCS
cannot be rotated. The TCS contains an internal shift lock solenoid to prevent the switch from being rotated when the engine
is not running.

The engine can be stopped with the TCS in any position. Once the engine is stopped the switch will automatically reset to the
'P' position and the transmission Park lock will be engaged, except if the TCS is in the 'N' position when the engine is stopped.

LED (light emitting diode) 's on the TCS illuminate to display the selected position. If the brake pedal is not depressed when a
selection is made, the selected position LED flashes and the mode selection is not performed.

marvelstar-store
PADDLE SWITCHES

Two gear change paddle switches are fitted at the rear of the steering wheel and allow the driver to operate the transmission
as a semi-automatic manual transmission using the CommandShift™ feature. Each paddle switch has three connections;
ground, illumination PWM (pulse width modulation) supply and ground switch signal.

The left paddle switch (-) controls the downshifts and the right paddles switch (+) controls the upshifts.

EMERGENCY PARK RELEASE

The 'shift by wire' control system has no mechanical or electrical EPR provision to remove the vehicle from Park in the event
of a system fault.

The Service Park Release (SPR) procedure must be used to rotate the transmission selector shaft manually to the 'N' (Neutral)
position. Refer to the relevant service procedure or the Automatic Transmission Description and Operation section.
For additional information, refer to: Transmission Description (307-01, Description and Operation).

OPERATION

TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS)

Rotation of the TCS to any of the five positions is sensed by the TCM via the high speed CAN (controller area network)
powertrain systems bus. The TCM reacts according to the selected position if all parameters for that selection are met.

The TCS has a magnetic system using Hall effect sensors to determine the position of the switch. The 'S' (Sport) position
selection allows the TCM to operate the transmission as a semi-automatic 'CommandShift™' system. Gear selections are
sensed by the TCM when the driver operates the steering wheel paddle switches. Once the TCS position is confirmed, the TCS
outputs applicable information on the high speed CAN powertrain systems bus, which is received by the TCM to activate the
correct gear and by the instrument cluster to display the selected mode or gear in the instrument cluster message center.

The paddle switches can be used on a temporary basis when the TCS is in the 'D' (Drive) position to override the automatic
gear selection if required.

PADDLE SWITCHES

The paddle switches are hardwired to the speed control switch on the steering wheel. Operation of a paddle switch completes
a ground path to the speed control switch. The speed control switch converts the completed ground signal into a LIN (local
interconnect network) signal which is passed via the clockspring to the CJB (central junction box) . The CJB converts the
signal into a high speed CAN powertrain systems bus signal to the TCM .

Pulling the left downshift (-) paddle switch provides down changes and pulling the right upshift (+) paddle switch provides up
changes. The first operation of either paddle switch, after 'S' sport mode is selected, puts the transmission into permanent
manual CommandShift™. Rotation of the TCS back to the 'D' (Drive) position returns the transmission to conventional
automatic operation.

Temporary operation of CommandShift™ mode can also be operated with the TCS in the 'D' (Drive) position. Operation of
either the upshift or downshift paddle switches activates the manual CommandShift™ mode operation. If the TCS is in 'D'
(Drive), CommandShift™ will cancel after a time period or can be cancelled by pressing and holding the upshift (+) paddle
switch for approximately 2 seconds.

The operation of the paddle switches is configurable by the driver using the menu in the instrument cluster. The menu allows
the driver to select operation of the paddle switches in 'S' (Sport) only (default setting for NAS and China market vehicles) or
in 'D' (Drive) and 'S' (Sport) (default setting all other markets).

NEUTRAL AND SHIFT LOCK

The shift lock strategy is controlled by the TCM . Shift lock is activated when the TCS is in 'P' or 'N' and the engine is running.

The shift lock is a requirement for the TCS . The switch is always locked at ignition on (power mode 6) when the engine is not
running, except after an engine stall when the selector is not in 'P' (Park) or 'N' (Neutral). If, when driving with the TCS in 'S'
(Sport), 'D' (Drive) or 'R' (Reverse) at a speed of more than 10 km/h (6 mph), the driver selects 'P' (Park) or 'N' (Neutral)
without the brake pedal depressed, the TCS will be immediately locked once the vehicle speed falls to below 10 km/h (6
mph).

With the brake pedal pressed, the TCS will remain unlocked for as long as the brake pedal remains pressed, regardless of
vehicle speed. The TCM will only engage the shift lock once the vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h (6 mph). If the driver
selects 'N' and releases the brake pedal with a vehicle speed of less than 10 km/h (6 mph), the TCS will be locked 2 seconds
after 'N' (Neutral) is selected. The TCS will remain locked until the driver presses the brake pedal again.

CONTROL DIAGRAM

NOTE: A = Hardwired; O = LIN Bus; AN = High speed CAN powertrain systems

marvelstar-store
 Item Description
1 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
2 Central Junction Box (CJB)
3 Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
4 Engine Control Module (ECM)
5 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module
6 Instrument Cluster (IC)
7 Clockspring - paddle switch inputs
8 Valve block
9 Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
10 Ground
11 Fuse - ignition supply from ignition relay
12 Ignition relay (CJB)
13 Fuse - Permanent battery supply

Published: 01-Jun-2016

marvelstar-store
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Transmission
Control Switch (TCS)
Description and Operation

Transmission Control Switch (TCS)

CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.

NOTES:

If a control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component.

Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the scan tool
to the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read by the
manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).

When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places, and with
an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into
account.

Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.

Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.

If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be the
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.

Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required.

The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Transmission Control Switch (TCS). For
additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop manual. For
additional information, refer to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls, Diagnosis and
Testing).

DTC Description Possible Causes Action

NOTE: Circuit
Park/Neutral Switch reference - P/N SIGNAL -
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Output Circuit -
P084F-11 park/neutral signal circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair
Circuit short to Park/neutral signal the wiring harness as necessary
ground circuit short circuit
to ground

NOTE: Circuit
Park/Neutral Switch reference - P/N SIGNAL -
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Output Circuit -
P084F-12 park/neutral signal circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
Circuit short to Park/neutral signal the wiring harness as necessary
battery circuit short circuit
to power

NOTE: Circuit
reference - P/N SIGNAL -
Park/Neutral Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
P084F-13 Output Circuit - Park/neutral signal park/neutral signal circuit for open circuit, high resistance.
Circuit open circuit open Repair the wiring harness as necessary
circuit, high
resistance

Gear Shift Control

marvelstar-store
 Module A Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
P085D-68
Performance - Event control switch the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
information internal failure transmission control switch

Gear Shift Control

Module A Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
P085D-96 Performance - control switch the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
Component internal internal failure transmission control switch
failure

NOTE: This DTC may be induced by the driver holding the

Gear Shift Control Transmission transmission control switch and opposing its automatic movement.
Module A control switch
Performance - movement Check the operation of the transmission control switch and
P085D-97 Component or obstructed ensure nothing is jamming or obstructing the mechanism.
system operation Transmission Rectify as necessary
obstructed or control switch Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
blocked internal failure the DTCs and retest. If the fault persists, install a new
transmission control switch

Missing/invalid
Vehicle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
data from the
U0028-87 Communication Bus the transmission control module for related DTCs and refer
transmission
A - Missing message to the relevant DTC index
control module

High speed CAN

Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
bus (powertrain)
perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical
Vehicle circuit short circuit
circuit diagrams and check the high speed CAN bus
U0028-88 Communication Bus to ground, short
(powertrain) circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
A - Bus off circuit to power,
to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair the wiring
open circuit, high
harness as necessary
resistance

Vehicle Missing/invalid
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Communication Bus data from the
U0028-92 the transmission control module for related DTCs and refer
A - Performance or transmission
to the relevant DTC index
incorrect operation control module

Car configuration
file mismatch with NOTE: After updating the car configuration file, set the
vehicle ignition to on and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs.
Control Module - No specification
U3000-00 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
sub type information Incorrect
transmission and up-date the car configuration file as necessary. Clear
control switch the DTCs and retest
installed Install a new transmission control switch as necessary

marvelstar-store
Published: 30-Sep-2014
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - External Controls
Description and Operation

COMPONENT LOCATION

Item Description
1 Downshift paddle switch
2 Upshift paddle switch
3 Transmission Control Switch (TCS)

OVERVIEW

The external controls comprise a rotary TCS (transmission control switch) and two steering wheel mounted paddle switches.

The TCS transmits driver transmission selections to the TCM (transmission control module) for transmission mode selections.
The paddle switches allow the driver to initiate gear shifts in all transmission modes; 'D' drive, 'S' manual CommandShift™.

DESCRIPTION

TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH

The TCS is a rotary switch installed in the floor console and controls the driver transmission selections.

The TCM allows the transmission to be operated as a conventional automatic unit by selecting P R N D on the TCS . Rotation
of the TCS allows the selection of P R N D S. Depressing and rotating the TCS clockwise from the D position, S mode can be
selected. The TCS is a fully electronic rotary transmission switch with no mechanical connection to the transmission.
Mechanical operation of the transmission corresponding to selections made on the TCS is performed by the TCM on the
transmission casing.
For additional information, refer to: Transmission Description (307-01, Description and Operation).

The TCS rises from its housing once the engine is running. When the engine is stopped, with the TCS in any position other
than 'N', it retracts into the housing again. If the TCS is in position 'N' when the engine is stopped, it remains in the raised
position for up to 10 minutes, for use in a drive-through car wash for example. After 10 minutes the TCS automatically
retracts. The TCS also retracts if 'P' is selected within the 10 minute period. If the TCS does not rise from the housing when
the engine is started, but electrical power is supplied to the TCS , the retracted TCS can still be rotated to make selections.

marvelstar-store
If electrical power to the TCS is lost, the TCS will not rise from the housing when the engine is started and the retracted TCS
cannot be rotated. The TCS contains an internal shift lock solenoid to prevent the switch from being rotated when the engine
is not running.

The engine can be stopped with the TCS in any position. Once the engine is stopped the switch will automatically reset to the
'P' position and the transmission Park lock will be engaged, except if the TCS is in the 'N' position when the engine is stopped.

LED (light emitting diode) 's on the TCS illuminate to display the selected position. If the brake pedal is not depressed when a
selection is made, the selected position LED flashes and the mode selection is not performed.

PADDLE SWITCHES

Two gear change paddle switches are fitted at the rear of the steering wheel and allow the driver to operate the transmission
as a semi-automatic manual transmission using the CommandShift™ feature. Each paddle switch has three connections;
ground, illumination PWM (pulse width modulation) supply and ground switch signal.

The left paddle switch (-) controls the downshifts and the right paddles switch (+) controls the upshifts.

EMERGENCY PARK RELEASE

The 'shift by wire' control system has no mechanical or electrical EPR provision to remove the vehicle from Park in the event
of a system fault.

The Service Park Release (SPR) procedure must be used to rotate the transmission selector shaft manually to the 'N' (Neutral)
position. Refer to the relevant service procedure or the Automatic Transmission Description and Operation section.
For additional information, refer to: Transmission Description (307-01, Description and Operation).

OPERATION

TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS)

Rotation of the TCS to any of the five positions is sensed by the TCM via the high speed CAN (controller area network)
powertrain systems bus. The TCM reacts according to the selected position if all parameters for that selection are met.

The TCS has a magnetic system using Hall effect sensors to determine the position of the switch. The 'S' (Sport) position
selection allows the TCM to operate the transmission as a semi-automatic 'CommandShift™' system. Gear selections are
sensed by the TCM when the driver operates the steering wheel paddle switches. Once the TCS position is confirmed, the TCS
outputs applicable information on the high speed CAN powertrain systems bus, which is received by the TCM to activate the
correct gear and by the instrument cluster to display the selected mode or gear in the instrument cluster message center.

The paddle switches can be used on a temporary basis when the TCS is in the 'D' (Drive) position to override the automatic
gear selection if required.

PADDLE SWITCHES

The paddle switches are hardwired to the speed control switch on the steering wheel. Operation of a paddle switch completes
a ground path to the speed control switch. The speed control switch converts the completed ground signal into a LIN (local
interconnect network) signal which is passed via the clockspring to the CJB (central junction box) . The CJB converts the
signal into a high speed CAN powertrain systems bus signal to the TCM .

Pulling the left downshift (-) paddle switch provides down changes and pulling the right upshift (+) paddle switch provides up
changes. The first operation of either paddle switch, after 'S' sport mode is selected, puts the transmission into permanent
manual CommandShift™. Rotation of the TCS back to the 'D' (Drive) position returns the transmission to conventional
automatic operation.

Temporary operation of CommandShift™ mode can also be operated with the TCS in the 'D' (Drive) position. Operation of
either the upshift or downshift paddle switches activates the manual CommandShift™ mode operation. If the TCS is in 'D'
(Drive), CommandShift™ will cancel after a time period or can be cancelled by pressing and holding the upshift (+) paddle
switch for approximately 2 seconds.

The operation of the paddle switches is configurable by the driver using the menu in the instrument cluster. The menu allows
the driver to select operation of the paddle switches in 'S' (Sport) only (default setting for NAS and China market vehicles) or
in 'D' (Drive) and 'S' (Sport) (default setting all other markets).

NEUTRAL AND SHIFT LOCK

The shift lock strategy is controlled by the TCM . Shift lock is activated when the TCS is in 'P' or 'N' and the engine is running.

The shift lock is a requirement for the TCS . The switch is always locked at ignition on (power mode 6) when the engine is not
running, except after an engine stall when the selector is not in 'P' (Park) or 'N' (Neutral). If, when driving with the TCS in 'S'
(Sport), 'D' (Drive) or 'R' (Reverse) at a speed of more than 10 km/h (6 mph), the driver selects 'P' (Park) or 'N' (Neutral)
without the brake pedal depressed, the TCS will be immediately locked once the vehicle speed falls to below 10 km/h (6
mph).

marvelstar-store
With the brake pedal pressed, the TCS will remain unlocked for as long as the brake pedal remains pressed, regardless of
vehicle speed. The TCM will only engage the shift lock once the vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h (6 mph). If the driver
selects 'N' and releases the brake pedal with a vehicle speed of less than 10 km/h (6 mph), the TCS will be locked 2 seconds
after 'N' (Neutral) is selected. The TCS will remain locked until the driver presses the brake pedal again.

CONTROL DIAGRAM

NOTE: A = Hardwired; O = LIN Bus; AN = High speed CAN powertrain systems

Item Description
1 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
2 Central Junction Box (CJB)
3 Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
4 Engine Control Module (ECM)
5 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module
6 Instrument Cluster (IC)
7 Clockspring - paddle switch inputs
8 Valve block
9 Transmission Control Switch (TCS)

marvelstar-store
10 Ground
11 Fuse - ignition supply from ignition relay
12 Ignition relay (CJB)
13 Fuse - Permanent battery supply

marvelstar-store
Published: 30-Sep-2014
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - Transmission Control Switch
(TCS) Knob
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTES:

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

1. CAUTIONS:

Do not start the engine.

Care must be taken to avoid damaging the

surrounding components.

Installation

1.
CAUTION: Make sure that a new component is installed.

NOTE: Make sure to install the TCS plastic carrier to the TCS
knob.

To install, reverse the removal procedure.

marvelstar-store
Published: 30-Sep-2014
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - Transmission Control Switch
(TCS)
Removal and Installation

Removal

NOTES:

Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.

Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

1. Refer to: Specifications (414-01, Specifications).

2.

3.

marvelstar-store
 4.

Installation

1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.

marvelstar-store